User:
In Course: ()
Instructor:


1) Introduction to Educator

You are at the Help Center for the Ucompass.com Inc. online course management system, Educator.
Use the table of contents that appears to the left to access help screens that will enable you to use Educator effectively.
The print icon at the bottom of each help screen accesses a printable version of the entire help center. As this is a large document, it may take a few minutes to load.


If you cannot find the information you need, please take a moment to let us know so that we can rectify that situation. Please send your comments to training@ucompass.com .


Note to Administrators: If your institution customizes the Help Center, new pages created by Ucompass will not automatically appear so as not to overwrite your customized pages. If that is the case, you will need to add headings to your table of contents as shown below. It is the same procedure as you follow for adding custom pages, except you will add *U instead of *C.
I've included the TABs that you need to use for indentation. If your browser does not allow you to tab within input boxes, make tags by adding < > brackets around the word TAB.
Although I've noted revisions, you need do nothing for these. They will automatically appear in the existing pages.

The heading list will be periodically revised below as Help Center updates are made.




New Headings added March, 2006

Add
Under Course Management >
<TAB>Toolbox *U


Revisions and New Headings added October, 2005

Add
Under Course Management >
<TAB>Course Explorer *U
<TAB>Course Compass *U
<TAB>Troubleshooting *U

Under Distributing Knowledge >
<TAB>Activating Objects *U

Under Evaluating Learners >
<TAB>Workload *U



Revisions and New Headings added September, 2005

Add
Under Course Management >
<TAB> Registration Information *U
<TAB> Finding Learners *U
<TAB> Tracking Learners *U

Under Customizing
<TAB>> Skins *U

Under Communicating > Groups > Discussion Boards >
<TAB><TAB><TAB> Discussion Search *U



Revisions and New Headings added August, 2005
Add
Under Course Management >
<TAB> Students Navigation Link *U
<TAB> Student Profiles *U

Revision
Under Customizing
Navigation Column has been revised



New Headings added 3-22-05
Under Communicating > Groups > Group Object IDs
<TAB><TAB> Learner-Led Groups *U
<TAB><TAB> Learner File Sharing *U


New Headings added 1-31-05

Under Distributing Knowledge > External resources
<TAB><TAB> Interactive Web Tour *U

Under Course Management
<TAB> Copying Courses *U





1.1) What is Educator?

Educator is a powerful yet easy to use Knowledge Management System. The terms "Educator Knowledge Management System" and "Educator Course Management System" are used interchangeably throughout this help section. As a Knowledge Provider working in the K-12, Higher Education, or Corporate and Professional Training industries, Educator will help you develop interactive and dynamic online communities that promote the effective transfer of knowledge.

People often refer to Educator simply as Ucompass. Of course, you are welcome to think of the program by whatever name is most comfortable. For clarification purposes however, Ucompass.com Inc. is the name of our company and Educator is the name of our interactive online knowledge management system.

To start, it may help to think in terms of fundamental principles with respect to online instruction. As a knowledge provider using the Educator course management system, everything you do can generally be broken down into one or more of three broad categories:

  • Content Delivery
  • Communication
  • Evaluation

    As you begin to develop or deliver your online course, you will soon recognize that each of your activities can indeed be placed within these categories. It might also be helpful to note that each enrolled learner will be participating in one or more of these categories as well.

    With respect to the Educator course management system, the goal of Ucompass.com Inc. is to provide a robust, user-friendly vehicle offering the highest possible number of knowledge distribution, communication and evaluation features. Each feature in Educator has been subject to careful analysis in order to ensure value-added tools are available that meet or exceed industry "best practices." As a knowledge provider using the Educator system and Ucompass.com Inc's service and support, you have access to what is believed to be the most advanced tool of its kind, anywhere.

    The methodologies and functionalities of Educator are covered within the Help Center to help you and your learners extract the maximum possible value from the Educator course management system.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    1.2) Basic Terms

    Educator is utilized by a wide range of educational providers with interests serving users in K-12, Higher Education, Corporate and Professional Training, and beyond. For ease-of-use purposes, this Help Center utilizes standardized terms that transcend the boundaries of any one industry.

  • Knowledge Provider - An individual using Educator to distribute knowledge. Common synonyms (depending on the environment you're teaching in) include: Teacher, Instructor, Moderator, Facilitator, or Trainer.

  • Learner - An individual using Educator in a knowledge receiving role. Common synonyms (depending on the environment) include: student, trainee, employee.

  • Learning Object - Any electronic resource that contains information. Examples include images, documents, movies, sounds, etc.

  • Web-Viewable Content - Resources viewable with a browser. Examples include GIF/JPG/PNG images, text and HTML documents.

  • Non Web-Viewable Content - Resources that must be downloaded to the user's computer and opened in the application that created them. Examples are Word documents, Excel or other spreadsheets, Graphics other than in the GIF/JPG/PNG formats.

  • PDF Document - Non-editable resource that must be viewed using a plugin called Adobe Acrobat Reader. This is a free download available at http://www.adobe.com.

  • Hybrid Content - Resources that may be Web-Viewable or Non Web-Viewable depending on the user's computer configuration. Some Non Web-Viewable content can become Web-Viewable with the aid of a downloadable player. An example of this is a resource saved in the Shockwave Flash format and viewed using the Shockwave Flash player.

  • Educator Explorer - The feature represented by this explorericon.gif icon enables users to browse through course content areas.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    1.3) Logging Into Educator


    Login Authentication via username and password that allows entry into a user account.


    Introduction

    If you are reading this, then obviously you've already logged in. This section isn't so much about how to log in as what you can do once you're in your account.

    What you see when you log in depends upon the number of classes you teach and have active. If you only have one course, then you will enter that course immediately upon login. However, if you have more than one course, even if they are not all active, you will view a screen that lists the courses and gives you several options.
    loginmanycourses.gifNote in this screen sample that you have options to the left of the course listing. Depending upon what your institution has set up for creating and deleting courses, you may see commands that allow you to create or delete a course. Under that is a way to log off the system.
    The large box in the center lists your courses.
    Under that is a listing of any courses that you currently have archived.

    Let's look at each of these sections more closely.

    BUILD NEW COURSE

    To create a course, simply click on the BUILD NEW COURSE button and fill out the course information page that appears. Details are provided in the Help Center section called Forming Courses if your institution relegates that task to instructors. If you don't even see this link, then there is a designated person at your institution that performs this function. If you don't see [BUILD NEW COURSE] then you likely won't see [REMOVE COURSE] either.

    My Courses

    The course listing gives you information about the course such as the name and official ID. The number of students currently enrolled will follow.
    Then below the course information is an option to check a checkbox if you want to make the course open automatically upon login. If this box is checked, then Educator functions as if you had one course--this one. When you log in, you'll be placed squarely in the course.

    To change your default course, click on the Course Manager link. Scroll through your active courses, remove the checkmark from the course you wish to retire as your default course, and select a new one if necessary. If you don't see a checkmark in front of any of your courses, check your archives.

    From here you can move to any of your other courses.


    coursemanagerdefaultcoursecheckbox.gif

    For more information on the Course Manager >, see that section in this Help Center.



    Archived Courses

    At the bottom of the current course listing on the login screen, you'll see another listing of courses if you have archived them. Again, once you are inside a course, the Course Manager main link would lead you back to the course lists, both current and archived.



    Logging off


    Formally logging off is an important task that you should train yourself to do if you are used to simply leaving the course page and browsing other sites. You would not leave your banking or other sensitive site without logging off and perhaps even closing the browser. Yet people routinely leave their coursework open to potential harm by others by not logging out of the system properly. This is also important for your students as it leaves a record of usage which is not accurate if the login and logoff time is not recorded.



    Usage Tips

    tip.gif If you set a default course, but another course keeps popping up instead, you probably forgot to remove the original checkmark. Make sure you don't archive a course that's selected as a default course because it will remain the default, until you remove the checkmark. Once it's been placed in archives, the checkmark won't be obvious.



    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com



    1.4) Educator Landscape


    The Educator Landscape: The layout of the default Educator environment including all navigation links and functions and the content area. The Screenscape can be customized for different looks and functions.


    Introduction

    This section will introduce you to the Educator course environment. Its main focus is on the functions that you can use to create and deliver online course materials. It is not focused on the look and feel of the course layout. Why is that? Because your own institution generally customizes the look of the course to fit institutional needs. So these screen examples may not look exactly like the courses you may see and use in your own customized Educator environment. But whether a button is called "Syllabus" or "Course Information", the function is still the same--to deliver basic course information. We are going to be concerned here with the functions and how to best implement them.

    educatorenvironment.gifLooking at any Educator course, you will see four basic areas. On the left (1) is the navigator column composed of the links and sublinks that will let you move around and perform the course functions you need to manage and create your course.


    At the very top of the screen is the head area (2) where the school logo and possibly additional navigation functions appear. On the right (3) is the course desktop where the course content appears. So clicking a link on the left will bring up content on the right. At the bottom of the screen is the toolbar (4) which contains links to often-used functions.
    To learn more about how to change these areas, see the Help Center Topic Customizing. Some institution set these areas up, allowing no customization once set.


  • Details

    environmentstudentview.gifThe main thing to understand about the Educator Screenscape is that, although your institution will initially receive Educator courses with a screenscape that includes all 17 main navigator links and over sixty sublinks, your institution will customize that environment so that only the functions used by instructors and students will be on-screen. This usually results in a reduction of main links as illustrated in the example at left. It also results in some re-labeling of the function keys in keeping with the institution's needs.

    Course Materials has been re-labeled Coursework in this example, and contains sublinks to assignments, worksheets, documents, quizzes, exams and practice tests. All of the communication tools such as the discussion boards, instant messaging, chatrooms and whiteboard are clustered under the Communication link.
    This is simply one example of how the Educator environment may be restructured to suit your needs. Sometimes the student view contains fewer links than the instructor view, if the institution opts to have the student access course materials only from within packets instead of as separate links.

    Because it isn't possible to anticipate what functions your institution will choose to use or disable, the next document will cover each of the seventeen major navigator column functions and all of their default sublinks. So if you don't see a link or sublink in your virtual classroom, it is because your institution's Educator administrators have decided to move or disable them.



    Usage Tips
    tip.gifSome institutions allow instructors to further customize their virtual classrooms. This practice results in mixed success. If your institution conducts student orientation to teach students how to use their online course components, changing the students' environment may cause confusion and may require you to conduct a mini-orientation within your own virtual classroom to familiarize students with the changes. If each instructor is responsible for his or her own orientation, then making changes from class to class will not have that great an impact.
    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    1.4.1) Navigation Panel


    Navigation Panel: The default control area where all links to other course sections are located. The navigator column can be customized to show or hide any link or add new links to internal or external sources.


    Details

    COURSE INFORMATION
    ANNOUNCEMENTS
    COURSE MATERIALS
    ASSIGNMENTS
    DISCUSSIONS
    QUIZZES
    EXAMINATIONS
    SURVEYS
    E-MAIL
    CHATROOM
    STUDENTS
    WHO'S ONLINE
    TECHNICAL SUPPORT
    EXTERNAL LINKS
    LOGOFF
    COURSES
    CUSTOMIZE
    There are seventeen main navigator links that come with your default Educator course. Many institutions leave these links exactly as they appear at left for instructors. Other institutions will cluster the assessments (Quizzes, Exams, Surveys) and Communication (Mailbox, chatroom, Who's Online, Discussions and Whiteboard). Some will move the sublinks around and place them under different main links.
    All of this is possible and explained in the section on customization. However, for the sake of uniformity, each Educator function will be defined here in the order in which they appear as the new course default.

    The functions (links and sublinks) are only defined here. I will explain how to use each one when we get to the appropriate packet. As some of the terminology is Educator-specific, it's good to get to know the function label. However, keep in mind that your institution may change the label to something that makes more sense for you, the instructor, and your students.




    Main Link #1:


    Course Information

    Registration Info
    Calendar
    Actions
    Grade Builder
    Tasksheets


    The Course Information link leads to a document that describes the course--sometimes called the syllabus or course guide. This document can be HTML and thus, directly editable, or it can be a Word Processing document which is downloaded by the student.

    Registration Info is a sublink where controls are for turning student access off or on, and recording course information used elsewhere in the course such as the instructor's name, email address and course name. This is also one of two places where you can change your password.

    Calendar is a sublink to a very simple calendar function that will note course activities and personal dates as well.

    Actions is a sublink to a scheduling function that will either set course activities to activate or deactivate at a preset time, or send you email reminders for whatever you specify.

    GradeBuilder is a sublink to the grade tracking and calculation function.

    Tasksheets are like "to-do" lists that you can create for students.



    Main Link #2:

    Announcements
    Current Announcement

    Notification Center
    Paging Center

    The Announcements main navigator link takes you to the announcement form where you can edit the announcement page--the first page a student sees upon login.

    Current Announcement simply takes you back to the announcement editing form.

    Notification Center is a sublink that allows you to either search to see who, in your class, has completed an activity, or set Educator to notify you via email or page when a specific activity, like discussion board postings or new email takes place.

    Paging Center is a sublink that allows select students to have special access to your pager number through the course.



    Main Link #3:

    The Course Materials
    Course Folders
    Common Folders
    Student Folders
    Packets
    Glossaries
    Content Exchange
    Upload Center

    The Course Materials
    main navigator link takes you by default to the Course Folders listing. However, this default can be changed by the customization feature, so that the main display is of packets or any other course materials. The sublinks that will display in the navigator column are:

    The Course Folders sublink is useful for getting back to the folder listing from a different sublink.

    The Common Folders sublink leads to folders that can be shared among your own courses or even among any Educator courses within your institution. Only instructors may access common folders unless specifically marked for student use.

    The Student Folders sublink takes you to folders where students upload and store course files, such as homework assignments or website files that they create.

    The Packets sublink will lead to a listing of Packets that hold course materials ordered in a sequential manner. These can be scheduled to unlock or lock automatically to control student access.

    The Glossaries sublink leads to an Educator feature where terms and definitions can be stored in a study sheet, used in learning games such as hangman or matching or linked to terms used in documents.

    The Content Exchange sublink leads to an area outside of the course where developed content can be uploaded to a central area and shared with Educator users from other institutions.

    The Upload Center is a feature that allows you to upload any file into an educator folder, or into an Educator special object area such as syllabi, exams, quizzes, or assignments.



    Main Link #4:


    Assignments
    New Assignment
    Student Folders
    Worksheets


    The Assignments main navigator link takes you to the table listing all external assignments or to the Educator assignment creation wizard or upload function.

    The New Assignment sublink returns to the assignment listing from other sublinks.

    The Student Folders sublink displays a list of all student folders.

    The Worksheets sublink displays the table of all worksheets or a link to the worksheet creation wizard or upload function.


    Main Link #5:

    Discussions
    Groups
    Add Group
    Remove Group
    Edit Groups
    Discussion Search
    Staff Board
    The Discussions main navigator link takes you to a listing of discussion groups that you can modify, join, activate or deactivate.

    The Groups sublink returns to the listing of groups from any other sublink.

    The Add Group sublink allows you to create a new group.

    The Remove Group sublink will allow you to delete groups and all of the attached messages. Any grades associated with these discussions will remain intact in the external assignment with which the discussion was associated.

    The Edit Groups sublink allows you to rename, activate, deactivate or control how students use the discussion group.

    The Discussion Search sublink will allow you to perform a search on any keyword, bringing up messages containing that term.

    The Staff Board sublink is a link to a special discussion forum made up only of Educator instructors and staff.



    Main Link #6:

    Quizzes

    New Quiz



    The Quizzes main navigator link leads to a display of quizzes or a link to the quiz creation wizard or upload function.

    The Create Quiz sublink takes you directly to the quiz creation wizard and upload function.

    Main Link #7:

    Examinations
    Create Exam

    Practice Tests
    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com

    The Examinations main navigation link takes you to the table of exams or to the exam creation wizard/download link.

    The Create Exams sublink will take you directly to the exam wizard or upload function.

    The Practice Tests sublink will take you to the list of practice tests or to the practice test creation wizard or upload function.


    Main Link #8:

    Surveys

    New Survey
    The
    Surveys main navigation link will take you to the list of existing surveys, or to the survey creation wizard or upload function.
    The New Survey sublink takes you directly to the survey creation wizard or upload function.


    Main Link #9:

    E-Mail
    Inbox
    Send Message
    Mail Folders
    Address Book
    Mail Lists
    Preferences
    The Mailbox main navigation link will take you to the inbox of your Educator email account where you may open and read mail.

    The Inbox sublink returns to the list of current messages from any other sublink.

    The Send Message sublink displays a new message form.

    The Mail Folders sublink displays the main default folders and any custom folders you have created.

    The Address Book sublink displays an alphabetical search form for finding entries to the address book.

    The Mail Lists sublink allows you to create custom mailing lists composed of class members OR outside addresses.

    The Preferences sublink allows you to configure email controls, forwarding addresses and signature files.


    Main Link #10:

    Chatroom
    The Chatroom main navigation link will take you to the general chatroom where all class participants may engage in real-time chat sessions.
    There are no sublinks under the chatroom since the navigator column disappears during a chat. There are navigation links within the chatroom itself that will allow you to leave or change chat styles from general to select group chat sessions or moderated chat sessions.



    Main Link #11:

    Students

    Student Management
    Profile Fields
    Take Attendance
    Find Students
    Home Pages
    Usage Log

    The Students main navigation link will display the entire student roster.

    The Student Management sublink takes you to an area where you can add or remove students in this course.

    The Profile Fields sublink allows you to add information fields to collect student information which will display in the student profile at the top of the grade summary.

    The Attendance sublink will allow you to mark which students are in attendance, absent or tardy. These fields are customizable.

    The Find Students sublink will allow you to perform a search for a student by name.

    The Home Pages sublink will display a list of students in your courses who have created home pages in the Educator system.

    The Usage Logs sublink links to reports on student usage by time, date and activities.



    Main Link #12:

    Who's Online



    The
    Who's Online main navigator link will open up a popup window displaying each student currently online from every course you teach. They may not necessarily be in your virtual classroom at the moment, but in another instructor's course. But the fact that they are currently online will appear to you. Other instructors and support staff will also be shown if they are online at the time. New mail alerts and a method for inviting those online to private two-way chat sessions are also links in the popup.



    Main Link #13:

    Technical Support

    Request Support

    My Support Cases



    The Technical Support main navigation column link takes you to a form that you can fill out to get help with course functions.

    The Request Support sublink takes you back to the support request form from any other sublink.

    The My Support Cases sublink is a compilation of any support requests you have made in the past along with their resolution.





    Main Link #14:


    External Links

    Site Folders

    Add Site Folder

    Student Bookmarks

    Search


    The External Links main navigation link leads to a listing of URLs that you have compiled as course enrichment links.

    The Site Folders sublink displays the custom folders that contain the collected site links and information.

    The Add Site Folder sublink will add a site to the designated folder.

    The Student Bookmarks sublink will take you to the collection of website bookmarks, if any, that your students have collected.

    The Search sublink will allow you to search for a student by name or any other profile field.






    Main Link #15:


    Logoff


    The Logoff main navigator link is an important link that breaks the connection between you and the Educator server ensuring that no one can inadvertently gain access to your course by backing in or using a bookmark.
    There are no sublinks.




    Main Link #16:


    Course Manager

    Courses

    Forcing
    Spreadsheets


    The Course Manager main navigation link displays a list of all of the courses that you teach or take, along with access links for entry into those courses.

    The Courses sublink will return to the course list from any other sublink.

    The Forcing sublink will allow you to set a condition that will force you and/or your students into a specific course document (using the object ID number) upon login.

    The Spreadsheets sublink will allow you to download your course grades into a spreadsheet.





    Main Link #17:

    Customize

    Skins

    The Customize main navigation link will take you to the course customization area of Educator where you may alter the looks and functionality of your classroom environment by changing colors, fonts, backgrounds, navigation functions, sublinks and images.

    The Skins sublink allows you to save the changes you have made to a course, name it, and apply it to other courses.


    Usage Tips
    tip.gifThe Educator Navigation Column is customizable for every institution. Functions should be arranged and streamlined to best fit how they are used by students and instructors.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    1.4.2) Toolbar


    Educator Toolbar: A set of icons at the bottom of most educator pages that serve as quick links to certain course management tools.

    toolbaricons.gif

    Overview


    iconhelpcenter.gif The Educator Help Center
    This icon leads from a course to the Educator Help Center. The Help Center can be customized for each institution by local administrators.

    iconsearch.gifThe Course Explorer
    This activates a pop-up containing a navigable course structure, links to other courses within an account, an advanced Object ID search mechanism, and even an internet search engine area.


    iconcompass.gif
    The Course Compass
    This icon will activate a pop-up window that allows you to transport yourself to any area in any course within a single account.

    toolbox.gif

    The Tool Box
    The Educator Toolbox contains many course construction tools such as the Object ID Link Builder, the API Link Builder, a simple Equation Editor and an embeddable Calculator. It also contains the Wireless Educator Emulator--software that will allow you to use Educator with a wireless Handheld device, and an Object ID Diagnostic Tool used to repair Object ID numbering problems. Specific directions for using these tools may be found in the Distributing Knowledge area of the Help Center.


    iconalert.gif
    The Alerts Function
    This icon is a gateway to Educator's Advanced Notification Center. In this area, instructors and students can choose to be paged and/or e-mailed when certain course events occur.


    iconviewaslearner.gif
    The Student/Instructor View toggle
    Clicking on this icon will allow you to view the course as a student so that you can see exactly what the student sees. Click on View as Instructor to toggle back to the instructor view.


    iconsecurity.gif
    Educator User Security Settings
    The Account Security feature allows you to customize the security settings in the instructor account. Password Changes, Session Timeout Settings, and Multiple Login Settings can be found here.


    workload.gif
    The Workload
    The wheelbarrow icon represents a link to a table that compiles links to all outstanding grading that you have to do at any specific time. Once an item is graded, it disappears from your workload. FYI, students have a workload too, that informs them of work they still have to submit.


    iconusersgroup.gif
    The Educator Users Group
    This icon is a portal to the Educator Users Group where all users of Educator come together to participate in Discussion Boards, share content in the Content Exchange, suggest New Ideas For Educator, and learn about New Features in Educator.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    1.5) Technical Requirements

    Technical Requirements: The equipment including hardware and software, needed to access Educator courses


    The Lowest Common Denominator technical requirements for using Educator are summarized below:

    PC (IBM compatible):




    Macintosh:





    Recommended for all operating systems:



    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com

    Updated July 2005




    1.6) Security

    Security: Settings that control passwords and logins.
    The security settings can be found by clicking the key icon in the Educator toolbar. Your password can also be edited by clicking the Registration Information sublink under the Course Information main navigation link

    Providing a stable and secure online environment is a critical function of the Ucompass.com technical staff. It is strongly suggested that users adhere to the following guidelines to ensure a secure online environment:

  • ALWAYS log off of Educator when finished with your work by clicking on the Logoff button found in the Navigation Panel.

  • If others have access to the computer you're using, you should also exit your browser completely upon logging out of Educator. To quit or exit your browser, either go to the menu drop down under File and select Close or use the X located in the top area of the window. This will provide an added layer of security.

  • Be extremely cautious regarding your password and the decision to share your password with anyone else. Any individual with whom you share this information should thoroughly understand the ramifications that could result from carelessness in compromising the integrity of your knowledge management system.

    For security reasons, bookmarked pages are not allowed within Educator. If a page is bookmarked, the bookmark will expire within 24 hours.

    Changing your Password


    There are several security settings over which you have control. The most important one is your password. Itís a good idea to change your password periodicallyóthe more often, the better the security.

    You can change your password in one of two places. One is through the Registration Information sublink under the Course Information main link. Scroll down to the Authentication Information section toward the bottom of the page. The other is via the security icon on the Educator toolbar at the bottom of most screens.

    When signing into Educator, your username is NOT case sensitive but your password IS case sensitive

    If you forget your password, your administrator should be able to give it to you or reset it so that you can enter a new one. If your administrator is not available, you can send an e-mail to support@ucompass.com. You MUST include the name of the organization you are associated with, your name, and a phone number where you can be reached. Be prepared to answer a series of questions before anyone from Ucompass gives out username and/or password information.

    You can also change or verify student passwords if necessary. This is done within the student account itself, which can be entered through the studentís grade summary. See the section on the Student Grade Report in the Course Management chapter of this manual.

    Security Settings Toolbar Link iconsecurity.gif

    The security icon leads to many more security settings than password and authentication control. Following is a point-by-point description of each setting and how it it is used.

    toolbarsecuritywindow.gifUnder the return link to your course, there is a statement of how many unsuccessful attempts there have been to access your account. This can simply mean the number of times you have mistyped your own password, or it can indicate attempts by others to guess your password. If you have any reason to suspect the latter, then you can type your email alert in the box at the bottom of the form that will alert you at the time of intruder activity. (However, if you do mistype your password, you will get an email notification of that as well.)

    The first account security setting is your password, which also records the date of your latest password change. If you wish to set a reminder for changing your password after a set number of days, you can do that at the bottom of the form just above the submit button.


    You may see a section that deals with WebDAV, a utility that is institution-specific and therefore not covered here. If you don't see these controls, then your institution is not using WebDAV.

    The next security setting allows you to indicate whether the session should be timed out after a period of inactivity. If you spend long periods of time in your course typing content without submit-ting periodically, then this should be set to NO. If you use Educator from more than one location, this should be set to YES.

    The last setting is to allow multiple logins to your account. This will prevent the current session from being cancelled when you open another window and sign in. Allowing multiple logins should only be set as your permanent setting if you are the sole user of your computer. Otherwise, you should restore your multiple login settings to NOT allow multiple logins when you are finished with a session that required multiple logins.

    If you do not have your account set up to allow multiple logins, you will have your current session cancelled if you attempt to log in again, receiving a ďsession cancelledĒ error similar to the following example.

    security2.gif

    Student accounts should be left at the default setting which is to NOT allow multiple logins. Changing this to allow multiple logins means that you will allow them to access different areas of the course during exams or other assessments, this default should be left as is.

    The ability to enter a studentís account while the student is also online is not affected by this setting.



    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com



    1.7) Legal Info

    ucompasshead.gif

    In the following information, you are the USER, Ucompass is the PROVIDER:

  • Information posted by the User on the Userís server that is furnished
    by Provider is property of the User. The Provider assumes no liability
    for material posted by User. User retains all rights he or she may have
    for such information.

  • Under no circumstances will User attempt to view, access,
    manipulate, download, transfer or intervene with the source code of the
    Educator software. The Educator software source code is the
    intellectual property of Edward Mansouri, Ucompass.com, Inc. CEO. Any violation of this will result in immediate suspension of service. In addition, Ucompass.com, Inc. and Edward Mansouri, Ucompass.com, Inc. CEO will aggressively seek financial restitution and damages from User incurred from the compromise of the Educator source code.

  • User will not use any of Educator's communication tools including Instant Messaging, E-Mail, Discussion Boards, or Chat to harass, intimidate, or offend any other user of Educator. Users who believe they are victims of harassment or intimidation within Educator should contact support@ucompass.com immediately with a description of the issue. Ucompass will prosecute those participating in harassing or intimidating behavior to the fullest extent of the law.

  • Any User who attempts to access another User's account without that User's express, written permission will have their access to Educator removed immediately.

  • Provider will not be responsible for failures, delays, interruptions or
    hindrances of Provider's services where such failures, delays,
    interruptions or hindrances are caused by war, riots, embargoes, strikes
    or acts of its vendors and suppliers, or acts of God including
    earthquakes, hurricanes, flash floods and tornadoes.

  • NEITHER PROVIDER, NOR ITS INFORMATION PROVIDERS, ARE RESPONSIBLE TO USER OR ANY OTHER PERSON USING USER'S ACCOUNT FOR ANY LOSS, DAMAGE OR COST, INCLUDING CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES AND/OR LOST INCOME OR PROFITS, ARISING FROM USER'S INABILITY TO USE SAID SERVICES.

  • User is responsible for all hardware and software necessary to connect to Provider.

  • User warrants that any material submitted for publication with Provider through User's account(s) does not violate or infringe any copyright, trademark, patent, statutory, common law, or proprietary rights of others, or violate any laws, statutes or regulations of the United States, and further covenants that such material shall not contain any obscene or arguably obscene matter.

  • If Provider feels information posted by User is of an obscene, threatening, radical or offensive nature, Provider will remove User's account immediately without warning.

  • Use of distribution lists in electronic mail, or other mass electronic mailing, is subject to approval by Provider.

  • User agrees that any and all activity or use of Provider accounts
    adheres to all applicable laws and regulations as well as Provider
    policies and guidelines. This includes, but is not limited to,
    unauthorized access (" hacking"), or any variation thereof, mass mailing
    or Spamming (unless authorized by Provider), and posting of lewd and/or
    morally obscene material.

  • User is responsible for all use of User's account(s). User must ensure
    that User's passwords remain confidential and must take precautions to
    ensure that only authorized persons gain access to User's account.
    Failure to take such precautions constitutes a breach of security and
    may result in the immediate suspension of User's account. Repeat
    suspensions for breach of security may result in permanent denial of
    service with Provider.

  • Provider will change access codes to User's accounts immediately upon
    the notification by User via phone, mail, E-mail or fax that his or her
    password has been lost, stolen, or otherwise compromised.

  • Any Interface or function implemented by the User will NOT be
    supported by Provider.

  • Ucompass has the right to suspend or remove any User accounts if it has evidence that any of the above terms and conditions have been violated.

  • If violations of the above terms and conditions involve any legal or civic damages to Ucompass or any other individual and/or organization, Ucompass.com, Inc. a Florida Corporation, will work with local, state, federal and international law enforcement authorities to prosecute those involved to the fullest extent of the law.


    1.8) Archiving Policy

    UCOMPASS ARCHIVING POLICY
    Effective July 1, 2004
    The following policies apply to clients whose e-learning servers are hosted by Ucompass

    In its effort to provide your institution with the most cost-effective, reliable and high speed hosting services possible, Ucompass will begin enforcing the arhciving policies below. It is important for administrative staff to fully understand these policies so that no confusion or unexpected results or data loss occur.

    E-Mail

    All e-mail messages in Educator mailboxes older than 120 days on the 1st of any given month will be permanently removed. This includes sent mail, and mail archived in mail folders. It is important to understand that in Educator, for both students and instructors there is a 'Mail Folders' link and for each mail folder listed, there is an 'Export' link enabling the user to self-archive all their old mail onto their desktop for long-term safekeeping and storage at any given time. A new mail folder called '100 days and older' will automatically appear in Educator so users are better aware of mail that will soon be removed.

    Student Enrollments

    On the 1st of every month, students that have not signed into a particular classroom in more than 180 days will be permanently pulled out of the course with any records/work permanently destroyed. On the 25th day of every month, a list of the students that would be removed the following week will appear here in the administrative console.

    Classrooms

    On the 1st of every month, classrooms in Educator that have not been signed into in more than 180 days will be permanently removed from the system and any work/records contained will be permanently destroyed. On the 25th day of every month, a list of the classrooms that would be removed the following week will appear here in the administrative console.

    Large Files

    In many instances, users have started to use Educator as a medium for exchanging media files such as songs, movies, and other high fidelity content believed to have a scope and purpose outside of the classroom. We do not yet have a clearly defined policy regarding this but expect one to be forthcoming. In the meantime, we are advising administrative staff to encourage users to use other resources for such purposes.

    Long-Term Archiving Options

    We understand many institutions have strict policies regarding the length of time course and student specific information needs to be retained. If the enforcement of the policies above conflict with your organization's internal policies regarding this, we can work with you to set up a long-term archiving strategy where the automatically archived data is backed up to a server or disk at your institution, or, it is backed up to a long-term storage apparatus here at Ucompass. Please contact Ed Mansouri at emansouri@ucompass.com to discuss possible options.



    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com



    1.9) Support

    Technical Support: A service which provides users with help in using the Educator LMS either through context-sensitive documentation or live service representatives.


    Details

    Live technical support for Educator will come from one of two places:

  • Local administrators servicing http://educator.ucompass.com
  • Directly from Ucompass.com, Inc.

    Support will be offered to you in one or more of three different formats:
    • E-Mail Support Handled within Educator
    • Immediate Callback assistance

    • Help Desk

    Different institutions make different levels of Educator Support available to instructors so all methods of support covered in these subsections may not apply to everyone.

    The Technical Support feature is designed to provide you with a gateway for Educator support.

    support1.gif



    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    1.9.1) Support Cases


    Support cases can be defined as official requests for technical help submitted to your organization's administration for resolution.

    When you have a question or are having difficulty using an Educator feature, one of the best things to do is to open up a support case.

    Your Support Case will either be answered by a local administrator of http://educator.ucompass.com or from someone at Ucompass.com, Inc., depending upon your institution's contract with Ucompass.com, Inc.

    QuickStart Directions

    1. Click on the Help or Support button located in your course.
    2. Read the directions pertaining to non-Educator issues, if any, that appear at the top of the form.

    3. Fill out the support request form.

    4. Submit the form. You will either get a return email or phone response.

    Details


    Technical Support
  • Click on the Support or HELP button located in your course. If you do not have such a link, then your institution has implemented a different support method. Please ask your administrator.

  • supportform.gif
  • Read any directions that appear at the top of the form that will help you with any non-Educator issues such as library or other institutional access.
    Even for Educator issues, you may be directed to a local phone number.

  • Usually a form appears where you can describe your question or problem. If you have a choice of filling out a support request form or calling a phone number, choose the form. This is important for two reasons: 1) It documents the request and marks it with a time/date stamp. 2) It allows Ucompass to monitor support issues and either make improvements to Educator or to the documentation that teaches you how to use it.

    Once you have submitted the request, you will see a tracking case number and status.

    supportcases2.gif

    The resolution to your case will usually be sent to you via email. However, if you should ever wish to review the entire case history, you can click on the My Cases sublink located under the Technical Support main navigation link.

    supportcases3.gif

    Click on the date stamp in the SENT column to view the entire document.


    supportcases4.gif

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com



    1.9.2) Help Desk


    A Help Desk phone number may be available for you. The Help Desk will either be staffed by local administrators of http://educator.ucompass.com, Ucompass.com, Inc. Technical Representatives or both.

    Send an e-mail to support@educator.ucompass.com to find out if a Help Desk Number is available for you.



    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    1.10) Educator Users' Group



    Educator Users Group: A national online assemblage of people who use the Educator learning management system. Members meet online at http://usersgroup.ucompass.com and communicate via discussion boards on a variety of Educator and elearning topics.


    QuickStart Directions

  • Go to http://usersgroup.ucompass.com

  • To join the EUG, click on the training@ucompass.com link in the lower left corner of the page and send an email to subscribe.

  • To view the articles and information on the website, click on the Information Center link.

  • Click on the Communication Center to join a discussion group. Log into the group by entering your email address.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    1.11) Message from Ucompass

    edphoto.jpgDear Educator Knowledge Provider:

    I would like to take this opportunity to thank you for using the Ucompass.com Inc, Educator Knowledge Management System.

    The most important information we receive is from you, the user, whose suggestions have been an important ingredient in Educator's success as a robust yet user-friendly knowledge delivery system.

    The next few years will likely bring more exciting innovations in Educator's capability to serve as an outstanding teaching and learning instrument. Its continued success will largely be a function of how it serves you, the individual knowledge provider.

    I would like to invite you to contact me personally at any time at my e-mail address mansouri@ucompass.com to provide me with your suggestions for improvement or any other ideas that will help keep Educator the best such system of its kind.



    Sincerely,
    edsignature.gif
    Edward B. Mansouri, CEO


    2) Course Management

    Course Management: Having to do with creating, copying, populating and scheduling the timing of online courses or course materials.

    Educator is a Course Management System. Each course facilitator has the capability of running an unlimited number of courses.

    In the Course Management section of the Help Center, you are provided with a number of methods that make the process of managing multiple courses easier.

    Use the table of contents on the left to help you navigate help center topics.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com



    2.1) Forming Courses


    Forming Courses: This refers to the creation of new empty courses that are ready to be filled with course content. Copying or cloning existing courses is covered in the Help Center sublink called Copying Courses.


    There are two methods by which courses can be added to your account: Database Integration and Manual Course Creation.

    Database Integration is the process by which Educator connects to your organization's SIS (Student Information System) and receives information that describes which courses you are currently managing. It then creates those courses thus removing you from the course construction process.

    Manual Course Creation describes the process of manually creating courses in Educator as needed. This Help Center section is only concerned with the manual creation of Educator courses.

    Creating a course in Educator also depends upon whether you already have an account and other courses in the system.


    If you Don't Have an Educator Account


    In order to form courses, you first need a Knowledge Provider account in Educator. To create an account, you will need a 9-digit access code which you can get from a local Educator administrator at your organization. For assistance in locating this individual, you can send an e-mail to support@educator.ucompass.com.

    Once you have your 9-digit access code, point your web browser to:

    http://educator.ucompass.com/educator/setup.htm

    The following form will appear onscreen:

    formingcourses.gif

    Toward the bottom of the page, you will notice a section labeled Registration. This is where you will input your access code.

    Information entered into this form can be changed at any time with the exception of one field. The ONE field that cannot be changed once you begin working in Educator is your Username field.

    The Time Zone you choose for your course will be the default Time Zone for all participants of the course. For example, if you are on the West Coast in the Pacific Time Zone, a learner in your course on the East Coast in an Eastern Time Zone would be governed by the Pacific Time Zone for all course activities including exam due dates and times, and time stamps on course resources. Although this is the default time zone, it can be changed if needed through the event scheduler discussed in the Help Center section called Distributing Knowledge:Scheduling Resource Delivery.

    USERNAMES AND COURSE IDS

    The last section of the form provides fields for you to enter a username and password. Your username and Course ID are extremely important in processing your web submissions to Educator's database. Your username should contain alphanumeric characters although underscores, hyphens, and periods are accepted. Spaces between first and last names in the username field are discouraged. It is recommended that you limit the number of characters to 20 or less for both your username and course ID.


    EXAMPLES OF COURSE IDS

    Bad Course ID: Astronomy 1: Our Solar System
    Good Course ID: Astronomy 1

    COURSE ID VERSUS COURSE NAME

    Here is an example:

    Course ID: Astronomy 1
    Course Name: Our Solar System


    If You Already Have an Account and Course


    Once you have formed your first course, additional courses are added using the Course Manager main link located in the Navigation Panel. Users should NEVER have more than one username in Educator. Educator has the capability to allow any one user to operate in an unlimited number of courses as a learner, knowledge provider, knowledge provider assistant (TA), or administrator simultaneously with one username and password.



    Note: The way your course looks...i.e. the button styles, background colors and fonts are determined by the administration at each institution. The administration creates an institutional default skin which is automatically applied to each new course created.



    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    2.2) Registration Information




    Registration Information: Where instructor and course information is managed.
    Registration Information is a sublink under the Course Materials main navigator link.

    QuickStart Directions


    To change your instructor password,
    To change your course name,
    To turn student access to your course on or off,
    To change Instructor name (for guest instructors, etc),
    To add or change instructor contact information (phone, email, etc),
  • Click on the Course Materials main navigator link
  • Click on the Registration Information sublink
  • Edit the form
  • [Submit]

    Details


    The Registration Information screen is where all of the course and instructor data is stored. Any information can be changed except for the course ID, which is generally tied to the course materials and student roster. This can only be edited when copying or cloning a course and may be something that is done only by local Educator administrators.

    The first section allows you to set meeting times and course prerequisites. This information will appear in the syllabus section of the course.

    The next section deals with instructor information. Changing an instructor's name does not change the ownership of the course. It will still be in the original instructor's account and access is via that person's username and password. It will look to students, however, as though another person is the instructor of record.
    If another instructor is permanently taking over a course, then that course should be copied or cloned into the new instructor's account.

    The next section allows you to alter the course name. Again, the course ID normally cannot be changed, especially if enrollment is automated. The exception is when cloning or copying a course. In that case, the course ID must be changed and the new course will not contain any student records.

    registrationinformation1course.gif



    Student access can be controlled in the next area. If the access is set to off, students will not see the course listed when they log in.

    The other settings in the student enrollment section are not often used. They control the enrollment method, which usually should not be touched unless your institution enrolls students manually. Some institutions that have rolling enrollments also set the length of the course. For example, if you wish the course to last eight weeks, but students enroll into the course daily, this setting will turn the course off to the student exactly 56 days after the student's first login.

    registrationinformation2student.gif



    The next section sets your security level. Instructors should have their multiple login setting set to yes. This allows them to have multiple screens open at the same time. Students should be set to no, unless the instructor does not mind them opening up parts of the course while taking an exam or completing other assessments.

    The IP section is another area that is used only in specific circumstances. If you wish to restrict access to the course to one computer only, you may input the IP address of that computer. You may also indicate a range of IP addresses. For example, a particular computer lab may have computer IP addresses that all begin with 123.456.... You can use asterisks as wild card numbers by specifying the IP range as 123.456.*.*
    You can also prevent certain IP addresses from accessing a course the same way.

    registrationinformation3security.gif



    The last section of the Registration Information form allows you to change your password.

    The extra field and alias textboxes are institution specific and tied into the automated enrollment process. You should not make changes in these areas.

    registrationinformation4authentication.gif

    Usage Tips


    tip.gifIf you teach a lot of courses, use color to code them for easier recognition. Simply use a font color HTML tag in your course name field: <font color=red>Introduction to Marketing</font>

    coursemanagerredfont.gif

    Anywhere you view your course listings, the red course name will stand out.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com



    2.3) The Course Manager


    The Course Manager feature is an interactive listing of all the courses managed by a single instructor. It is a main link on the course navigation column.


    Click on the Course Manager main link in any course navigation column.

    coursemanager1.gifA listing of all of your active courses will appear along with basic information such as the course name, ID, and the number of students enrolled.

    The course that you are currently in will be designated.
    If your institution assigns the course copy function to instructors, you will also see an option to copy or download the course you are currently viewing. Separate documentation is available on this topic through your administrator.


    You can make certain courses stand out if you wish by changing the font color or size of the course name in the Registration Information sublink of the Course Information main link. If you do this, your course will stand out as in the Marketing 101 example shown above.

    If you view your course as a student (See Viewing Materials as a Student), you will have the option to enter the course from the student point of view upon login. You will see a second listing of the same course, but this time at the student level. You may toggle between views by using the VIEW AS INSTRUCTOR and VIEW AS LEARNER links in the Educator toolbar located at the bottom of most Educator course screens.


    The Course Manager Sign-In Screen


    When you log in, you will see a slightly different version of the course manager. Instead of a copy/clone/download link, you will see an option to make any course your default course. This means you will go directly to that course upon login and bypass the course listing altogether.

    coursemanagersignin.gif

    The default course option is a login feature and is only present at the login screen. Once you have it set, the mechanism to remove the option is present at the course manager listing from within the course itself. If you remove the option, you must return to the login screen to set it again for another course.

    caution.gifCaution! If you archive your course, don't forget to remove the default setting. You cannot set another course as a default until you remove previous default settings.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    2.4) Course Explorer



    explorericon.gifCourse Explorer: Course search engine


    QuickStart Directions

  • Click on the magnifying glass icon in the toolbar located at the bottom of a course page.
  • Enter an object ID number to locate that resource
    OR
  • Click on a folder in order to locate resources within it
    OR
  • Enter search terms in the textbox provided if your institution has incorporated online search engines such as Google or AltaVista into your courses.
  • Click [Search]

    Details

    How do you find an object ID once youíve created it? The answer lies with the course explorer icon that resides on the Educator toolbar.

    The magnifying glass icon represents the handy utility that lets you search for documents that you have uploaded or created in Educator. Conversely, if you run across an object ID number in a document, but are not sure what that document is, you may enter it in the Explorer and submit to retrieve a link to that document.

    stretcher.gif
    toolbarexplorer2.gifstretcher1.gifThe left side of the explorer popup will list all of the course and system folders (exams, assignments, etc) in your course. Clicking on a folder will reveal the contents including the file and the object ID number.
    If you canít find the correct folder, you can open all the folders simultaneously by clicking on the Show all files/objects link.


    On the right side of the popup, you can type in an object ID number or file name and a link to that file will be retrieved.

    The explorer can even include links to internet search engines, if set up by your local administrator.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    2.5) Course Compass



    The Account Compass: Method of jumping from one course to another.


    QuickStart Directions

  • Click on the compass icon in the toolbar located at the bottom of most course pages.
  • Click the down arrow to activate the drop-down menu
  • Select a section and course from the listings.
  • Click the [GO] button.

    Details


    The compass icon coursecompass.gifin the Educator toolbar will activate a pop-up window that allows you to transport yourself to any area in any active course within your own account. Simply select an area in a course in the drop-down menu and then click on the GO button (in this example, the GO button is hidden behind the drop-down menu).

    toolbarcompass2.gif




    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com



    2.6) Copying Courses


    Copying Courses: the duplication of any course or course segment either in the user's own account or another instructor's account.


    The Copy/Clone/Download function is located in the Course Manager under the current course listing.
    Note: Some institutions reserve the right to copy courses for administrators only. In that case, you will not see the function link.

    You may want copies of a course or a section of a course for your own use, or to supply to another user.

    There are up to four options to choose from when copying a course. The options can be found by going to the Course Manager of the course you wish to copy then finding the Copy/Clone/Download Course link which is shown below:

    copyingcourses1.gif
    (Note: Make sure that the course is not archived or else it will not appear in your course list)

    Once this link is followed, you will be given the opportunity to choose from four options as shown below:

    copycourses2.gif

    Option 1 - Download content from this course to desktop

    This will place a zipped copy of Educator on to your local computer desktop for offline development only. You will need to then reupload the individual files you modify to the proper location in your course.

    Option 2 - Copy content from this course to a new course shell.

    This will create a new course with a new Course ID and will place all content (no learner records or resources) from the original course into the new course.

    Option 3 - Copy content from this course to an existing course

    This will dump all content (no learner records or resources) from the original course to a target course that already exists. Note that if you don't have another course into which you can copy materials, this option will not be visible.

    Option 4 - Clone course into the Common Folders

    This will let you transfer your course to another user via the Common Folders which are open to all Instructors using Educator at http://educator.ucompass.com.




    Once you have chosen a copy option, a new form will appear which will allow you to schedule the action. Because courses cannot be modified at the time copying is taking place, it is advisable to schedule the copying at a time when course activity is minimized.

    If you are duplicating a course within the same account, you will need to change its course ID. A course information page must be completed. Changes to other course information may be made at this time.

    copycourses3.gif

    Tips

    tip.gifAdministrators: If there is no option to copy a course from within an instructor's account, you must change the account settings from the support module. Copying from one account to another is an administrator function that must be done in the support module.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    2.7) Archiving Courses


    Archiving a course means to remove the course access link from the course manager listing and list it on a separate archive page. Courses that have been archived can still be accessed by clicking on the Archived Courses link at the bottom of the course manager page.


    QuickStart Directions

    Upon Login

    Archived courses are listed underneath your active course listings.

    From Within Your Course

  • Click on the Course Manager link in the main navigator column.
  • Scroll to the bottom of the page and click on the Course Archives link.

    coursemanager2archives.gif

  • Place a checkmark in front of each course that you wish to remove from the course manager listing
  • Click on [Submit]


    Details

    Archiving a course does not remove any student records or uploaded content from that course - it just lets you minimize the amount of scrolling you may have to do if you have many courses within your Course Management System.

    NOTE: Archiving a course does not mean learners from that course can no longer access the course! You have to specify that condition separately. Archiving just refers to whether the course is visible to you on your main list of courses.


    Tips

    tip.gifBefore archiving a course that you have set as your default entry course, remove the checkmark that marks the course as your entry point upon login.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    2.8) Students Navigation Link


    The Students link on the course navigation column leads to your class roster. On this page are also the options to add, remove or suspend students, as well as links to gradebooks.


    Click on the Students main link in any course navigation column.

    Your student list will appear.

    studentsrosterlist.gif

    The first column lists the students' full name. Also if you have made modifications in the student's profile, such as making them invisible or adding roster notes (see below), these will appear here.

    The second column will display the students' user name. If a smiley icon is also present, this indicates that the student has uploaded an image into their profile.

    The last column will display the last date and time that the student logged into the course.

    Above the roster table, you'll see a link that will allow you to change your enrollment options if you wish. Please review the Help Center section on enrollment options before doing anything to this setting. Usually, these settings are set by your administration and should not be changed.

    Under the enrollment option link is a Show Grades link that will display your list of students along with their current course grade. If you have a set up your letter gradebuilder, the letter grade will show. Otherwise, a numerical value will display. This may take a few minutes to compile.

    Underneath the roster table, you will see options to
  • Show all profile photos on a single screen or view grades using several different gradebook options. These are covered in the Help Center section on the Gradebook. However, to summarize here:
  • The New Gradebook Interface is a scrolling table where you can view or edit grades for your entire class at once. It can also be set to show grades for specific learning objects, or specific students.
  • The Old Gradebook Interface also allows you to input grades for your entire class at the same time but with less control over the display.
    Both gradebooks have an export/import feature that allows you to upload and download grades into a spreadsheet.
  • The Flash enhanced Small Gradebook allows you to input grades for a single assignment into a flash-based tool.
  • The Flash enhanced Full Gradebook allows you to input grades for all assignments into a flash-based tool.

    Finally, at the bottom of the screen, you'll see a link to the Suspension Manager which allows you to restrict course access of specific students. This does not delete their records if they have begun the course. But it does not allow them into the course while you have them designated as suspended.


    Modifying Student Information

    Information that is displayed in the Students area generally comes from the student profile, and this is where any changes to that information must be made. The student profile can be found from within the student grade summary. Click on any student's name on your Students roster table to view that student's grade summary and profile link.

    studentsmodifystudentprofiles.gif

    Clicking on Modify Student Profile takes you to the information that is mostly supplied by Educator and the student him or herself.

    studentsmodifystudentprofile2.gif

    Again, the student roster notes appear underneath the student's name in the roster listing. (See roster example at the top of this screen)

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    2.9) Adding Learners to Courses


    Students can be added to a course several ways depending upon the settings established in your administration module.

    Students can self-enroll into your course if your institution has chosen to set your courses as Open Enrollments.

    Students can be enrolled by your institution or by you, yourself, if the setting is set to Controlled Enrollments. Controlled enrollments are futher categorized into automated, manual, single or batch uploaded procedures. You will probably only need to familiarize yourself with one process. If you do not know the enrollment policies of your institution, it's strongly advised to find this information so that you can learn only the procedure(s) that apply to your situation.

    The enrollment environment is set for all courses in your institutions administration module. However, it can be changed in any given course by going to the Registration Information sublink (Course Settings) under the Course Information main link. The information that follows explains each situation.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    2.9.1) Open Enrollments


    Open Enrollment: Students enroll themselves to courses.


    This is a self-enrollment situation where students can go to the URL: http://educator.ucompass.com/educator/register.htm to search for and register for a course.

    If a learner already has a username and password in Educator, they should be told to go to their Course Manager Main Link in one of their existing courses, then to the REGISTER FOR COURSE link to add that course to their account.

    No individual should ever have more than one username in Educator as the program enables you to take or teach an unlimited number of courses with just one account.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    2.9.2) Controlled Enrollment


    The Controlled Enrollment option requires students to be enrolled into courses by the institution or instructor.



    There are several methods for enrolling students into courses. As an instructor, you will probably only be interested in one of the manual methods described in the next section.

    This is followed by a general description of a typical automated process in which students are enrolled into courses upon registration at your institution. If this is the case, you probably will never need to enroll students into your course at all.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    2.9.3) Adding Learners Manually

    Add Learners Manually to your courses one of two ways: one at a time, or by uploading a student list containing enrollment information.
    Caution: If a student does not yet have an account in Educator, this procedure will create one. Therefore if your institution has an automated process that issues usernames, be sure that you use that same username for student Educator accounts created here.


    QuickStart Directions

    This function may be restricted to Administrators at your institution. In that case, the following links would not be visible.

    To enroll a single student into your course:
    • Click on the Students main navigator link
    • click on the Add Student sublink
    • Add the student's name (title and middle name are optional)
    • Choose a registration method:
      1. You can have Educator email the student an authorization code which will allow them to choose their own username and password. If you choose this option, you must fill in an email address.
      2. You can manually enter the student's name and password information yourself.

    • Click [Submit]



    Details


    Manually add a learner to your course by accessing the Add Student sublink of the main link Students.

    Simply fill in the following fields:Email Address: An email address does not have to be provided unless you choose Registration Method One above, or wish to include a welcome message.

    Level: The level refers to the enrolled member's classroom status, which may be either "student" or "Teaching Assistant", a level that carries certain instructor editing priviledges. Details for using TA's are covered separately in this Help Center.

    Welcome Message: You may prepare a separate file containing your welcome message and place its object ID number in the Welcome Message Input box. This message would be sent to the email address provided in the email input box.
    You may also choose to create a custom welcome for each student by clicking on "Customize welcome message". This will open a textbox for your custom message.
    Note, if you want to type in a custom welcome message, select this link before filling out the other data fields. Some browsers will lose information already typed into the field boxes if you click this link afterwards.

    Then select the registration method. As shown in the image below, there are two options:

    controlledenrollment.gif

    In Option 1, the learner is e-mailed a randomly generated 9-digit access code. The learner needs the code to access the registration form. After receiving the code, the learner can go to http://educator.ucompass.com/educator/register.htm, and search for your course, then use the code to register and choose their own username and password. If the learner already has a username in Educator, he or she can go to one of their pre-existing courses, then to the Course Manager (a main link in the Navigation Panel), then to the REGISTER FOR COURSE link and use the code to add the course to their account.

    In Option 2, the knowledge provider creates a new username and password for the learner who will automatically be enrolled into your course. The learner then needs to go to http://educator.ucompass.com to sign directly into your course with the new username and password.

    If you are adding a learner who already has a username and you want to manually add the learner to your course, you need only enter their username, not password, in Option 2 and you will be able to add your course to their pre-existing account.

    addlearner2alreadyexists.gif

    As a knowledge provider, you can batch upload student data files when you go to the Add Student sublink of the main link Students. You will notice a link called UPLOAD A STUDENT DATA FILE . Find the link circled in red in the capture below:

    batchupload1.gif

    Following the circled link will take you HERE where you can upload a text file with learner enrollment information.

    The feature is very flexible but you need to closely follow the instructions below:

  • First, your roster must be saved in a TEXT ONLY format. If you try to upload a Word Document or some other binary-encoded file format, it WILL NOT WORK. All word processors and spreadsheet utilities give you an option to save a resource as a text file.

  • Next, check the fields that are contained in your text file (At the very least, First Name and Last Name are required)

  • Use the pulldowns to specify in which column specific fields are located (see capture below)

  • Select the type of delimiter you are using (Comma, Tab, Semicolon, Colon)

  • Attach the file from your network or computer

  • Press the [Upload File] button

  • Review the information for accuracy then press the [Finalize] button and the accounts or pre-accounts will be added to your course

    batchupload2.gif

  • If you do not include username and/or password information, Educator will make this information up for you

  • If Educator detects you are uploading usernames that already exist, it will give you the option to add your course to the user's account or to abort for that specific entry. Although the system automatically generates passwords if you do not provide them in the form, existing passwords will not be replaced.

  • If you check the top box labeled Access Code Generation, users will be formed a 9 digit preregistration code which will let them add your course to their account when you are working in a Controlled Enrollment environment

  • If you include e-mail addresses, Educator will send an e-mail to the learners informing them of their new course enrollment


    Tips
    tip.gif Do not use the standard Educator email address if the user does not yet have an account, even if you are creating one here. A welcome email will be attempted before the account is actually created, resulting in an error.

    tip.gif If you wish to use a custom welcome message, click on the link before filling out the user information so that the custom message textbox opens for your use.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    2.9.4) Automated Enrollments


    Automated Enrollment occurs when Educator periodically receives student enrollment information from your institution's Student Information System (SIS).


    You may work within an organization that utilizes a registration program that can communicate course enrollments to Educator through some kind of file transfer. If this is the case, the task of adding learners to your courses is handled for you. The following is a brief explanation of how this occurs.

    Educator connects to your organization's data server, collects learner enrollment information, then populates the necessary courses in Educator. You may send an e-mail request to us and find out if your organization takes advantage of Educator's Database Integration capabilities. The e-mail should be sent to support@educator.ucompass.com.

    If you work in an environment where Database Integration is activated, you should not add or remove learners from courses so as to avoid duplication of or incorrect use of usernames. Your local Educator administrators will be able to give you more specific information about local policies and procedures with respect to learner enrollments and records in Educator.

    If your institution does not utilize an automated enrollment method, then use the table of contents to locate the topic Adding Learners Manually which describes manual methods for adding or removing students from courses.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    2.10) Finding Learners



    Find Learners: A sublink under Students that will search for students enrolled in any of your courses by name, username, year in school or email address.


    QuickStart Directions

  • Click the Students main navigation link
  • Click the Find Students sublink.
  • Fill in one or more of the search parameters: name, email address, username or year in school.
  • Specify a course, if known.
  • Click on [Search]

    Details


    stretcher.gif

    You can find any student enrolled in any of your active classes from any class.

    Search by first name
    last name
    email
    username
    year in school
    or even a score or status.
    studentsfindlearners01.gif

    The more parameters you specify in the search by identity, the faster the search will be. If you are not sure of a specific name, you can try pattern matching.
    This will look for various forms of your search string. For example, if you are looking for a particular student, but only remember that his last name ended in 'field'---i.e. Butterfield, Greenfield, etc, you can check the pattern matching box and simply type in the last name field. Anyone with that string within the name: Butterfield, Fields, Fielding, etc. will be displayed.

    studentsfindlearners03name.gif

    Along with the display of student names will be options to e-mail the group, add them to a discussion group, assign them to a packet or force them to a particular object when they next log in. Note that any emails sent to the group will be sent blindly, so that they are not aware of others that received the same mail.



    Under the identity search area is the performance search area. Here you must specify the course that contains the assessment score that you wish to search. Click on [Go] and another form will appear, where you can describe the students that you wish to identify. i.e. students who
  • scored less than
  • greater than
  • equal to
  • have started
  • have not completed
  • have never entered the course.
    Then specify any numerical values and assessment to which these conditions should be applied.

    studentsfindlearners02.gif

    Results are similar to the identity search, except if your search is based on a score, each student's score will be displayed.

    studentsfind03score.gif

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    2.11) Tracking Learners



    Tracking: A method of searching for students by test scores or course progress.
    This can be done from the [Students] link, or from within an assessment.


    QuickStart Directions

    From the [Students] link:
  • Click the Students main navigation link
  • Click the Find Students sublink.
  • Specify the course that contains the students that you wish to track.
  • Click on [Go]
  • Specify the search parameters: i.e. students who
  • scored less than
  • greater than
  • equal to
  • have started
  • have not completed
  • have never entered the course.
  • Specify any numerical values and assessment to which these conditions should be applied
  • Click [Search]

    From within the Assessment:
  • Click on the Advanced Tracking link in the object control panel.
  • Specify the characteristics that describe the students that you wish to identify: students who scored less than
    greater than
    equal to
    have started
    have not completed
    have never entered the course
  • Specify the score
  • If you wish to specify a different assessment, you may change that in the drop-down menu that displays the assessment name.
  • Click on the [Search] button.
  • Your search results will appear along with options to email, group, redirect or force the students that meet your set criteria.

    Details


    While the Notification Center can track student activities such as log-ins, submissions and access, you may wish to track student performance as well. You can do this from your course roster, or from within any evaluation object such as an exam or assignment. The end result will be a list of students that meet criteria that you set. For example, you can extract a list of all students who scored less than a passing grade on an exam. Or you can identify students who have not yet begun working on an assignment.

    General access to this feature is through the [Students] main navigation link.
  • Click the Find Students sublink.

    At the bottom of the form that comes up, you'll see an area marked: Find learners based on performance. Select the course in which you wish to perform your search.

    studentsfindlearners01performance.gif

  • Click on the [Go] button.
  • Next, describe the students in terms of scores or course progression that you wish to identify. i.e. students who
  • scored less than
  • greater than
  • equal to
  • have started
  • have not completed
  • have never entered the course.
  • Then specify any numerical values and assessment to which these conditions should be applied.

    studentsfindlearners02.gif

    A list of students who meet the set criteria will be displayed along with their progress or score.

    studentsfind03score.gif

    At this time you can do any one of the following:

  • Email the students. An email form will appear with all of the listed students names selected in the Blind-copy column. This means that they will not be able to see who else received the same email.

  • Add to a New Group.
    A blank group form will appear which will allow you to create a new discussion forum with these students as the sole members. studentsfindadd2group.gif

    As soon as you submit the new group name and topic, students will automatically be notified of their membership in the group via email.studentsfindadd2group2.gif

    You may then post the initial message.studentsfindadd2group3.gif


  • Assign to a Packet.
    studentsfindadd2packet01.gifIf you select the [Assign to a Packet] option, you will be presented with a listing of all the current course packets. The packet you select will appear in the student's packet listing.
    The default is set to unlock when locked. This means that the packet will be unlocked for these students even though it remains locked for everyone else in the course, meaning other students won't even see the packet listing.
    No escape means that the students will not be able to view anything but this packet.


    studentsfindadd2packet02.gifAfter you submit the first settings, you will be presented with a summary page where you can fine tune individual settings for each student.


  • Force Somewhere

    When you set up forcing conditions, you are specifying where the student will go when they next log in. You can either type in an object ID number, or you can designate a CGI resource such as exams, mailbox or packets.
    Type in the number or CGI resource and click on [Submit]studentsfindforce1.gif


    You may deselect individual students if you wish.studentsfindforce.gif


    Forcing conditions will remain in place until you remove them. To remove them, go to the [Course Manager] main navigation link and click on the Forcing sublink. Bypass the first page which sets forcing conditions for the entire class. Click on Set individual Forcing Conditions.

    You will then be presented with a page listing all students and any forcing conditions that have been set. Remove those you wish to inactivate. forcingremove.gif




    You can perform the same type of search from with an assessment. Click on the Advanced Tracking link in the assessment control panel.

    tracking1advcontrolpanel.gif

    You will then see the same form described above where you can input search parameters; i.e. students who
  • scored less than
  • greater than
  • equal to
  • have started
  • have not completed
  • have never entered the course.
    Then specify any numerical values and assessment to which these conditions should be applied.

    stretcher.gif

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    2.12) Removing Learners from Courses


    Removing Students here refers to the removal from a course--not the deletion of an account from the system.



    Removing students from a course can be done manually or as part of an automated enrollment integration process.

    QuickStart Directions: Manual Removal


  • Click on the [Students] main navigation link.
  • Click on the Remove Student sublink.
  • Either check the checkbox at the top of the page to remove all students or place a checkmark in front of individual names that you want to remove.
  • Click the Remove Students] button.
  • Check over the names that appear on the next page for accuracy. If you spot an error, click the [back] button and make your corrections.
  • Click [Continue] to complete the process.


    Details


    Step One: Click on the [Students] main navigation link. (Some institutions have renamed this function Roster or Student Roster)

    Step Two: Click on either the Remove Student sublink, or the Student Management sublink, depending upon how your institution configured your classroom skin. If you click on the Student Management sublink, you'll find the Remove Student link on the next screen.

    Step Three: If you want to clear the course of all students, chech the checkbox at the top of the page.
    Otherwise, place a checkmark in front of each student's name that you want to remove and click [Remove Students].
    Note: As an alternative to removing students and their records altogether, you may want to consider suspending them. This prevents further access to the course, but preserves the records. See the next Help Center topics for details.

    studentsremove.gif


    Step Four: Check over the names that appear on the next page for accuracy. If you spot an error, click the [back] button and make your corrections.

    Step Five: Click [Continue] to complete the process.

    Note that you will remove all student records from that course when you remove the student from the roster.


    Automatic Student Removal


    If your institution implements an automated enrollment system to add students to your courses, then student removal may be automated as well. This means that if a student drops your class, their name will be removed or suspended by your administrators. Students who are suspended will still appear in your roster, but they will be marked as suspended and be invisible to other students.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    2.13) Suspending Learners



    Student Suspension: Denying access to a student without removing their course records.




    QuickStart Directions


  • Click on the [Students] main navigation link.
  • Click on the Suspension Manager link that appears at the bottom of the course roster list.
  • Select the Suspended radio button in fron of the individuals that you want to suspend.
  • Click the [Submit] button.
    Suspension settings may be changed at any time by returning to the suspension manager.

    studentssuspend.gif


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    2.14) Teaching Assistants - TAs



    Teaching Assistants: A course participant who is given special editing privileges in order to perform specified instructor functions. The TA function makes it possible to have multiple instructors in the same course.



    Knowledge Providers can add TA (Teaching Assistant) accounts to their courses. The TA accounts are actually learner accounts that have been issued Knowledge Provider privileges.

    Knowledge Providers can add a new TA to their course or can promote a learner into the role of a TA. Below we will look at both scenarios.

    Adding a new TA to your course

    Go to the Add Student sublink under the Students main navigation link. Complete the form to add the learner, selecting the Teaching Assistant option as diagrammed below:

    ta1.gif

    Note: Don't forget to click on the Submit! button located at the bottom of screen.



    Converting a Current Learner into a TA

    If you have a student enrolled in your course to whom you would like to give TA rights, you can change their status from within the student profile.
  • Click on the Students main navigation link
  • Click on the name of the student
  • In the student profile, find the hyperlinked field labeled Level

    ta3studentrecordslevel.gif

  • Click on the hyperlink and change the classification of a participant from Learner to TA or vice-versa. You may also change the official title or label of the teaching assistant to something more appropriate such as guest lecturer or visiting professor, etc.


    Setting TA editing Permissions

    You will be able to specify which Knowledge Provider Main Links the TA should have access to and the order in which they will be displayed. If you give the learner access to a specific Main Link, he or she will be able to do everything you can do as a Knowledge Provider at that link with the exception of removing the course or adding a new course.

    If you know how to create course skins, you can even create a skin having only those buttons and functions that you want your TA to have. See the section on called Customizing in this tutorial. Note that some institutions restrict customization to administrators.

    ta4roles.gif

    Once you have indicated the TA roles, scroll down toward the bottom where you'll see an option to allow the TA to manage all students (default) or just those students in his assigned groups. This allows you to have more than one TA in a course, each responsible for different students.

    TAgroupmanagement2.gif

    Click on [Submit] to finalize the process.



    When the new TA signs in, they will continue to enter through the Learner perspective of the program, using the same username and password. However, on each page in Educator, the TA will now see a red TAicon.gif icon labeled that they will use to click into the TA portion of Educator in order to perform the functions you have assigned to them.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    2.15) Student Profiles


    Student Profile: Basic information about students. Information for the student profile is supplied in part by Educator from enrollment records and in part by the student.


    The student profile appears at the top of the student grade summary. Click on any student's name on your Students roster table to view that student's grade summary and profile.

    studentsmodifystudentprofiles.gif

    Clicking on Modify Student Profile takes you to the profile form that is mostly filled out by Educator, from enrollment information and the student from within a course. You as an instructor also has control over the content and display of this information.

    studentsmodifystudentprofile2.gif

    Special notations such as course section numbers or student id's can be made within the student profile. These Roster Notes will appear only to instructors underneath the student's name in the roster listing.




    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    2.16) Calendar


    calendaricon.gifCalendar: An Educator feature that can be used as a simple calendar viewable by you and your students, or as a personal planner, viewable only by you. Besides the link from the Educator toolbar, a calendar sublink can be found under the Course Information main link.


    QuickStart Directions

  • Click on the Course Information main navigator link.
  • Click on the calendar sublink.
    (or scroll down to the bottom toolbar and click the calendar icon calendaricon.gif)
  • Click on any date in order to post a calendar event
  • If you wish students to be able to view the event, place it in the Course Activity box at the top. If you wish to keep the note private, enter it in the personal daily planner.
  • Click [Submit] if you don't want to schedule an action. Otherwise continue...
  • To schedule an action for a later time or date, click on the time link at which you want the action to occur.
  • Choose Object Control if you wish to type in the object ID number of the item you wish to schedule, or email reminder if you wish to send yourself a future message.
  • Fill out any parameters and then [Submit] to complete the procedure.


  • Details

    By default, all 12 months appear on your calendar. At the bottom of your Calendar you can specify which months you would like to have appear upon clicking into the Calendar. Dates that have passed are shaded in blue, the current date is shaded in red and future date are shaded in white.



    calendar1.gif

    Notice each current and future date is a hyperlink on the calendar. In the example above, the 25th of the month displays a red 'R' icon representing a "Reminder". The 'R' indicates that there is something scheduled on that date. Click on the 'R' to view or edit the information.

    To schedule a course event or a personal event, first click on the date the event will occur. To enter information for a course event, enter the desired information in the Course Activity text box. To enter information for a personal event, enter the desired information at the appropriate times and dates located in your Personal Daily Planner.

    calendar2.gif

    Course events will automatically be viewable (but not editable) on the Calendars of learners when you place that information in the Course Activity text box. Students will see the date and the activity (entered as text by you)associated with that date. Any activities scheduled in your Personal Daily Planner calendar will only be viewable to you. Learners also have a Personal Daily Planner that is not viewable to instructors. Calendars do not span courses. All entries are course-specific.

    Once you have entered your information, press the [Submit] button at the bottom of the screen.

    Usage Tips
    tip.gif Course activities that you schedule with the action schedulers will appear on your personal planner, but not on the student's calendar. The only way you can place calendar information for student viewing is by entering it right on the calendar itself.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    2.16.1) Actions


    Actions:: Any scheduled change in status of a course activity or...
    a reminder of an impending activity. Actions can be scheduled in advance to operate automatically.


    QuickStart Directions

  • Click on any controlled activity object (exam, discussion group, packet, etc)
  • Click on the Schedule Action link in the control panel

    actionsschedulewithalerts.gif

  • Indicate the date that you wish to have this activity take place
  • Choose the action (make active, make inactive, lock, unlock)
  • Check any optional activities that you would like to occur when this action takes place: i.e. force students into the object, send email alerts)
  • If you have optioned to send email alerts to yourself or your students, type in the email text.
  • Click [Submit]

    Details

    Scheduling Actions from the Actions Sublink

    Any packet and its contents can be scheduled to activate or inactivate automatically at a specified date and time.
    scheduling1actionssublink.gifBesides the Schedule Action option in the object control panel of a controlled object explained in the QuickStart Directions, there is also an Actions sublink under the Course Information main link. To use this, you must first know the object ID number of the item you wish to schedule.


    A controlled object is any object with an option to activate, deactivate, lock or unlock. General documents can't be scheduled for viewing. But if you put them in a packet, the packet itself can be scheduled to lock or unlock, giving you control over all course materials.

    actionscheduletable.gif

    After scheduling an object and clicking on [Submit], a table of scheduled actions will show you what you have set. To change or remove an action, click on the action link: for example, in this example, you would click on Locked to change or remove the scheduling for that object.


    Scheduling Independent Email Reminders

    Email reminders don't have to be associated with a particular scheduled action. You can schedule an email reminder to yourself or anyone else in the class about anything. To do this:
  • Click on the Course Information main navigator link
  • Click on the Actions sublink
  • Click on Schedule an Action

    actionscheduleemail.gif

  • Set the time and date and change the Object Control selection to Email Reminder
  • Click on [Submit]
  • Type in the email address if the message is not to go to yourself.
  • Type in the message
  • [Submit]Your email message will be delivered at the time and date you specified.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    2.16.2) E-Mail Reminders



    E-mail Reminders: can be scheduled in advance to be sent automatically through your Educator course. This is found by clicking the Actions sublink under the Course Information main link.


    QuickStart Directions


  • Click the Course Information main navigation link.
  • Click the Actions sublink.
  • Click the link named SCHEDULE AN ACTION.
  • Fill in the scheduling information.
  • Select E-Mail Reminder from the drop down menu and submit.
  • Supply the email text and address to which you want the reminder sent.

    actions1.gif

    actions2.gif

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




  • 2.16.3) Scheduling Resource Delivery

    Actions: Any scheduled change in status of a course activity or reminder of an activity. Actions can be scheduled in advance to operate automatically. /td>

    QuickStart Directions

  • Click on any controlled activity object (exam, discussion group, packet, etc)
  • Click on the Schedule Action link in the control panel

    actionsschedulewithalerts.gif

  • Indicate the date that you wish to have this activity take place
  • Choose the action (make active, make inactive, lock, unlock)
  • Check any optional activities that you would like to occur when this action takes place: i.e. force students into the object, send email alerts)
  • If you have optioned to send email alerts to yourself or your students, type in the email text.
  • Click [Submit]


    Details

    Scheduling Actions from the Actions Sublink

    Any packet and its contents can be scheduled to activate or inactivate automatically at a specified date and time. Besides the Schedule Action option in the object control panel of a controlled object explained in the QuickStart Directions, there is also an Actions sublink under the Course Information main link. To use this, you must first know the object ID number of the item you wish to schedule.

    By controlled object I mean any object that has an option to activate, deactivate, lock or unlock. General documents can't be scheduled for viewing. But if you put them in a packet, the packet itself can be scheduled to lock or unlock, giving you control over all course materials.

    actionscheduletable.gif

    After scheduling an object and clicking on [Submit], a table of scheduled actions will show you what you have set. To change or remove an action, click on the action link: for example, in this example, you would click on Locked to change or remove the scheduling for that object.


    Scheduling Independent Email Reminders

    Email reminders don't have to be associated with a particular scheduled action. You can schedule an email reminder to yourself or anyone else in the class about anything. To do this:
  • Click on the Course Information main navigator link
  • Click on the Actions sublink
  • Click on Schedule an Action

    actionscheduleemail.gif

  • Set the time and date and change the Object Control selection to Email Reminder
  • Click on [Submit]
  • Type in the email address if the message is not to go to yourself.
  • Type in the message
  • [Submit]

    Your email message will be delivered at the time and date you specified.

    Usage Tips

    tip.gifIf you are sending an email alert to your students, and you are using the View As Student feature in your course, you need not check the option to send yourself an email, as you will get one due to your student status in the course.




    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    2.17) View Course as Learner



    View as learner to see the learning objects you have created from the student point of view. The most common way of doing this is through the VIEW AS LEARNER icon in the Educator toolbar at the bottom of each screen.


    QuickStart Directions
    • Click on the viewaslearnericon.gif icon at the bottom of most course screens
    • The first time this is done in a course, an alert will appear explaining the process of creating your identity as a student

      viewaslearnerself.gif

      Click [Continue]

    • You will be at the course welcome page with only learner privileges
    • To return instructor privileges, scroll down and click on the viewasinstructoricon.gif icon.

    Details

    There are several suggested activities to assist Knowledge Providers in understanding the Learners enviornment. While Technical Support may be available to your Learners through Ucompass.com or from Educator administrators at your organization, you still may find Learners coming to you for assistance.

    The Educator Course Management System perspectives within the Navigation Panel for course facilitators are similar, yet in some ways different to how Educator looks to Learners. We recommend you add yourself to your course as a learner and become familiar with how your course looks from the perspective of a Learner.

    We also recommend that you, as a learner, visit the Learner Tutorial.

    You may also find a need to occasionally view the course from the perspective of a student enrolled in your course. This can be done through the student's grade summary/profile.
    • Click on the Students main link in the navigator column
    • Click on the student's name
    • Click on Enter course as student which is a link in the student profile part of the grade summary.

    As a course facilitator, you will be impacted by the level of support provided to the Learners at your organization. Different organizations offer their Learners differing levels of support. Please contact your local Educator administrators at support@educator.ucompass.com for information on proper procedures for providing support to Learners.

    tip.gifTips!
  • If you enter a course as a particular student, and the student is online at the same time, do not log out of the course as the student or you will interrupt their session as well.
  • Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    2.18) Toolbox

    The Toolbox contains course construction and maintenance utilities and can be found in the Educator toolbar at the bottom of most course pages.


    toolbox.gif The Educator Toolbox contains many course construction tools such as the
    • Object ID Link Builder
    • API Link Builder
    • Equation Editor
    • experimental Audio/Video upload tools
    • an embeddable Calculator.

    It also contains the Wireless Educator Emulator--software that will allow you to use Educator with a wireless Handheld device, and an Object ID Diagnostic Tool used to repair Object ID numbering problems.

    Specific directions for using these tools may be found in the Distributing Knowledge area of the Help Center.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com



    2.19) Troubleshooting



    Troubleshooting: This section will document some of the things that can go wrong in Educator, and how to fix them yourself before calling the help desk.


    Duplicate or Missing Object Id Numbers

    Details


    Duplicate or Missing Object ID Numbers

    If you ever notice that more than one resource in your course(s) has the same Object ID Number or if you notice a resource that is missing an Object ID Number, this is a sign that your Object ID Database may be unstable.

    We recommend you investigate this by clicking on the Educator Toolbox icon toolbox.gif then clicking on the Object ID First Aid Kit icon firstaid.gif.

    View your Object ID Database and if you see a lot of errors, you may want to schedule an Object ID Repair Job to help stabilize your Object ID Database:

    firstaid2.gif

    Why does this happen? Often when we rearrange objects or copy courses, an interruption may occur and the database becomes unstable. An unstable or damaged Object ID Database can lead to problems with all aspects of your course(s) including grade builder functions, packets and links to internal Educator resources.
    The object ID repair kit realigns the databases in all of your courses. So it isn't something you should do often--only when you suspect a problem.

    stretcher.gif


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    3) Distributing Knowledge



    Distributing knowledge: the ability to publish information or content electronically for Learners.


    Knowledge can come from an infinite number of sources but ultimately, once delivered within Educator, it will be saved in some sort of electronic format.

    Educator is designed to let you easily take information in the form of files of any type from your computer, scanner, network, CD, or even other users in Educator (with appropriate permissions); and post it in Educator in an organized manner ready for distribution to your Learners. Using the text boxes online, you may even develop and distribute content that has been written within an Educator template.

    In this section we will cover strategies of maximizing Educator's powerful content delivery and publishing capabilities.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    3.1) Types of Content



    Types of Content here refers to the file types that are uploadable into Educator and viewable on a course web page.



    Files can be stored in a plethora of electronic formats resulting in an unlimited number of ways to store information. While any file can be uploaded into Educator for use within a course, only certain types are able to be rendered easily onscreen due to limitations imposed by the web environment itself.

    You will be provided with some fundamental information within this Help Center to assist you to build courses with content of the highest possible quality.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    3.1.1) Web Viewable



    Web-Viewable Resources: those that are viewable within your web browser without the help of additional programs or utilities.


    Educator is a browser-based application, meaning it runs completely within the infrastructure of the web browser. When you use Educator, you are viewing Educator in a web-viewable format (through your browser). Whenever possible, we recommend delivering documents saved in web-viewable formats because this insures all users will be able to view the contents without having to purchase additional software.


    HTML
    HTML which stands for the Hyper Text Markup Language, is a coding methodology for marking up content to be displayed in a web browser. You can also insert links to other files within an HTML file. The World Wide Web itself is an endless connection of links from one HTML file to another creating a network that spans servers across the planet.
    While you don't need to know HTML to create good course content, knowing just a few tags and how they work will make your finished displayed information more attractive.
    Placing an HTML 'tag' in front of a word will cause that word to display a certain way. A tag is made up of two brackets containing a command. Placing a similar tag at the end of the word(s) will end the formatting.
    For example, to make a word bold, you would place the HTML tag <b> in front of it. To stop the bolding, place the end tag </b> after it.

    To create this: Make this word bold.
    You would type: Make this word <b> bold </b>.

    It's as easy as that. Learning about ten tags allow you to add variety and color to your text.

    Here is a short list of useful HTML tags:
    bold<b></b>
    italic<i></i>
    larger font<big></big>
    smaller font<small></small>
    centered text<center></center>
    font colors<font color=red>
    (...or blue, green, etc)
    </font>

    You can embed other types of web viewable media into an HTML file including pictures, illustrations, movies, sounds and more. As a knowledge provider or instructional designer using Educator, these same principles described herein, can be applied to developing web-viewable content.


    Images
    Images are served up over the web in one of three formats: GIF, JPG and PNG.
    GIF stands for Graphic Interchange Format and JPG stands for Joint Photographic Experts Group.
    PNG stands for Portable Network Graphics and is the newest usable format for web display. GIF is pronounced 'jif', JPG is pronounced 'jay-peg' and PNG is pronounced 'ping'.

    Instructional Designers and facilitators follow a simple rule of thumb regarding images. GIF images are better for saving illustrations or text while JPG images are better for saving photography. PNG file format was meant to replace the GIF format, but the gif format continues to be more popular. PNG files are said to compress better with better quality in the picture. The differences in the file formats relate to how they render and process colors.

    There are many software applications for both the Macintosh and PC computers that enable you to convert graphics into web-viewable formats.

    Programs range from the freely available GIF Converter software to professional commercial products such as Adobe Photoshop.

    This Help Center does not offer training in using Graphic software packages and you are encouraged to explore books or local training opportunities if you wish to learn more about designing graphics for the web.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    3.1.2) Non Web Viewable



    Non Web-viewable refers to files that need a to be downloaded and then opened with a third-party application such as a word-processor, graphics program or spreadsheet program.


    A knowledge provider or Learner who attempts to view content after downloading the content to their computer is viewing the content as a non-web viewable resource. Content displayed within the infrastructure of the web browser is accessed as web-viewable content.

    Non web-viewable resources need to be opened in an application that can read the file in its native format.

    Educator lets you publish resources saved in any format. However, whenever possible we recommend saving resources into web-viewable formats such as HTML, GIF or JPG.

    Most software applications that have been produced in the last several years have built in programs that let you export resources to a web-viewable format.

    When you convert a resource into a web-viewable format, you can usually expect to see some change to the structure or appearance of the content depending on its complexity. Therefore, it will not always be possible to convert to a web-viewable format and you may need to deliver the resource in a non web-viewable format giving specific instructions about how to download and view the content.

    As an example, if you had a Microsoft Word document comprised of text, you could save it as HTML and other than some minor font and/or formatting changes, the HTML resource would look close to how it originally looked in MS Word.

    However, if you had something like an elaborate blueprint created in a desktop publishing software like Adobe PageMaker, when you convert to HTML, you may experience format changes which may be unacceptable with something as precise as a blueprint.

    Learning how to save content and convert from one format to another is a skillset that takes time and practice to develop. Once you get the hang of it, developing state of the art online content is a breeze.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    3.1.3) Resources that require Players

    You will find that some content can be web-viewable if the user has a specific player installed within the browser. Without the player, the content is either non viewable or must be downloaded to your computer to be viewed. Often, the user will be automatically prompted to download the necessary player in order to access the file desired.

    A common example is Macromedia Shockwave Flash files. These file types can create and display animated, interactive web presentations when the flash player has been installed on the computer.

    If you author content in a format that you know requires a player, you should be prepared to communicate this to your learners and also be able to direct them to a web address where they can download the player.
    Educator has implemented several Flash-enhanced features that allow you to drag and drop resources in order to manipulate them. (See Rearranging objects, Gradebooks and Interactive web tour topics in this help center)
    For this reason, we recommend that you install Flash player version 7 on your system, if you don't have it. These features, such as the packet master, rearrangement utility and dicussion board group manager still have non-Flash counterparts that lets you accomplish the same thing without using Flash. But we think you'll find the Flash-enhanced version a real time-saver.
    flashicon.gifFlash-enhanced Educator features are identified with the Macromedia Flash icon.


    Educator has a number of downloadable players built in but there are literally thousands of different types of players and it is impossible to account for all of them.

    CLICK HERE for a list of freely downloadable players for Macintosh and PC computers.

    Usage Tips

    tip.gifIf you don't have Flash Player 7, and attempt to use the Flash-enhanced rearrangement utility, you may get an error or you may just get a blank screen, depending upon your browser. It is strongly recommended that you download the flash player from the Macromedia home page in order to enhance your experience in Educator.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    3.2) Course Materials



    Course Materials: An organizational main link under which lie sublinks leading to non-assessment objects or delivery options such as: Course Folders
  • Common Folders
  • Student Folders
  • Packets
  • Glossaries
  • Content Exchange
  • Upload Center

  • The Course Materials main navigator link takes you by default to the Course Folders listing. However, this default can be changed by the customization feature, so that the main display is of packets, tasksheets or any other course objects. The sublinks that will display by default in the navigator column are:

    The Course Folders sublink is useful for getting back to the folder listing from a different sublink. Details on using course folders can be found in the Course Folders section under the Distributing Knowledge topic of this help center.

    The Common Folders sublink leads to folders that can be shared among your own courses or even among any Educator courses within your institution. Only instructors may access common folders unless specifically marked for student use. Details on using common folders can be found in the Common Folders section under the Distributing Knowledge topic of this help center.

    The Student Folders sublink takes you to folders where students upload and store course files, such as homework assignments or website files that they create.

    The Packets sublink will lead to a listing of Packets that hold course materials ordered in a sequential manner. These can be scheduled to unlock or lock automatically to control student access. Details on using packets can be found in the Packets section under the Distributing Knowledge topic of this help center.

    The Glossaries sublink leads to an Educator feature where terms and definitions can be stored in a study sheet, used in learning games such as hangman or matching or linked to terms used in documents. Details on using Glossaries can be found in the Glossaries section under the Distributing Knowledge topic of this help center.

    The Content Exchange sublink leads to an area outside of the course where developed content can be uploaded to a central area and shared with Educator users from other institutions.

    The Upload Center is a feature that allows you to upload any file into an educator folder, or into an Educator special object area such as syllabi, exams, quizzes, or assignments. Details on uploading documents and files into Educator can be found in the Adding/Uploading Resources section under the Distributing Knowledge topic of this help center.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    3.3) Course Folders


    Course Folders are storage areas that hold course files other than specially formatted tests, quizzes and assignments. Typical course documents are Word Processing documents, PDF files, spreadsheets, images or sound files.
    Course files can only be used by the members of the course in which they were created. Course folders is a sublink under the Course Materials main navigator link.


    QuickStart Directions

  • Click the[COURSE MATERIALS] main link
  • Click the Course Folders sublink
  • Click on NEW COURSE FOLDER
  • Type in folder information:Name = system or filename
    Label = How the folder will appear on the Educator Desktop
    Comments = information about the contents
  • Click the [SUBMIT] button.
  • Create a subfolder within this folder by clicking on the New Subfolder link at the top of the screen and repeat the steps above.
    You will notice a folder and file path created at the top of the page. Reading from the right, the path shows you which file, folder or subfolder you are currently in and whether it is locked or unlocked. To return to the view listing all of the main course folders, click the arrow.
    folderpath.gif


    Details

    Creating New Folders

    Before you can create or upload any course documents such as lectures, PowerPoint presentations or even sound files, you must create a folder in which to store them. The only files that are NOT stored in course folders are specially formatted course activities such as quizzes, exams, assignments, discussions, etc.

    Let's go through the process of creating a course folder paying attention, this time, to the details.
    • Once you have clicked the [COURSE MATERIALS] main link and the Course Folders sublink, you will have an option to create a NEW COURSE FOLDER.
      At the top is the New Folder Location. It will show as New Course Folder until you give it a name. The up-pointing arrow indicates the way back to the main listing of all course folders.
      If you were creating a subfolder, the New Folder Location would show you the entire path:
      ^- FOLDER --> NEW COURSE FOLDER

      foldercreate1.gif

    • Type in the Folder Name, which is the file name on the UNIX server. File names cannot contain characters other than letters or numbers. Any others (&%$ etc including spaces) will be removed. Your choice of a name here is important as this is what Educator will alphabetically sort. So a file named filethree will appear above a file named filetwo. If you wanted filetwo to appear above filethree, you could implement an alphabetical plan of your own such as
      aafiletwo
      abfilethree

    • Type in the Label which will appear in the folders listing as a clickable link on the Educator Desktop.
      Example >
    • folder-course1.gif


    • Set the Status or accessibility to students. A locked folder will not be visible to students. It cannot contain unlocked files.

    • Type in Comments which is descriptive text that will explain folder contents to other users or to you in the future.

    • Click on [Submit].


    Changing Folder Settings

    Once you have created course folders you may wish to change or manipulate them or their contents.
    Click on any course folder name to view the folder settings that you have specified. Folder settings include the folder name, label and status. These are listed at the top of the screen.

    foldersettings1.gif

    To change these settings, click on the Modify Folder Settings link.
    Note: A subfolder or file cannot be unlocked (made viewable to students) if it resides in a locked folder.

    This screen also allows you to do the following:

    Download folder to desktop: This downloads a copy of the entire folder to your local computer desktop where you can work on the files offline and then upload the revised files back to the original folder. (The original file must be deleted)

    Copy folder to other courses is a link that will allow you to select other courses within your account to which you can copy the contents of the folder.

    Export folder to Common Folders is a link that will create a copies of all folder files to the common folder you designate. Subfolders are cannot be copied this way. If you wish to have a common folder with the same name as the current folder, you must create a common folder first, and then copy the course folder contents to it. This is the only way to copy subfolder contents as well.

    Remove folder will delete the folder and all of its contents. Please be sure that you wish to delete all the contents of the folder as the deletion is permanent.

    Upload Files is a link that will allow you to upload one or more files to the folder.

    Add Text or HTML File is a link that will bring up a blank form that will allow you to create a web-readable file on the spot within this folder.

    Remove files is a link that will allow you to delete one or more files from the folder. A listing of files will appear with checkboxes that you can mark for deletion.

    Copy folder to students is a link that will allow you to select one or more student folders to which folder contents will be copied. Use this sparingly as you may be making multiple copies of large files that use up system resources. A better tactic may be to place a link to the file within a document and allow students to download the document to their desktop.

    Copy/move files is a link that works similarly to the Remove files or Copy to students links.
    folderset2copy.gif


    Main Points

    • Course folders differ from common folders in that they store files that can only be accessed by users of that course.
    • Only the course instructor can upload or delete course folder files.
    • Course folders must be unlocked before students can view the contents.

    Usage Tips
    tip.gif When assigning course folder names, be aware that capital letters will precede lower case letters when folder names are listed alphabetically. Therefore aaZfolder will come before aaafolder.

    tip.gifYou can hard code HTML in Educator by paying attention to System Folder Names.
    For instance, suppose you had a folder with a Folder Name of chemistry and a subfolder within that folder named images. If you had an file in the images folder named atom.gif, you could insert an HTML image tag in an HTML file inside of the chemistry folder that could look as follows:
    < img src="images/atom.gif ">
    Note that the virtual path to this resource would be as follows:
    http://educator.ucompass.com/educator/username/courseid/chemistry/images/atom.gif

    The username and courseid in the above path refer to your Username and Course ID respectively. That would be YOUR username and YOUR course ID and they need to be coded in all lowercase--no capital letters as UNIX is a case sensitive computing environment.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com



    3.4) File Management


    A discussion of file types is covered in the previous Help Center document called Types of Content. This section covers Educator file settings that allow you to control the way users access files.

    Files can be set as Locked or Unlocked.
    • A Locked file (even if it is in an unlocked folder) is invisible to Learners unless they are given a link directly to the resource. Putting a locked file into a Packet, for example, will cause that file to be visible when the student is in the packet.
    • An Unlocked file will be viewable to the Learners if you give them access to the Course Folder that contains that file. This means you must unlock the folder AND the file within it.

    Files have a File Name and a Display Name.
    • The File Name is how the resource is named on the UNIX server where Educator is hosted. An example is file.html. The File Name must adhere to certain restrictions that apply to any file that is displayed on the web. There should be nothing except letters, numbers, hyphens and a file extension in the File Name. Other characters, such as most punctuation marks or other symbols are reserved for other functions in a web environment. So you cannot use characters like &, !, @, #, $, & *, (, ) or ? to name a few.


    • The Display Name is the name of the resource as it appears to Learners--usually the link to the document. This can be anything you choose and can have any type of symbol, space or character. For example, this document has the display name of
      File Management. (The link is disabled for this example)





    The File information screen will be different depending on the type of file you are working with. Some file types allow you certain functions such as VIEW or EDIT--some do not. All files may be e-mailed, copied, linked and moved to other folders or courses. In order to learn the functions appropriate to different filetypes, we are going to look at File Information screens for four different types of resources:
  • A Text/HTML document
  • an Application Document
  • a GIF image
  • and a Shockwave movie.


    HTML and TEXT documents

    If you remember from the Help Center topic on Types of Content, HTML documents and Text documents are both web-readable. This means that if you upload such a file into one of your folders, and make it accessible to students, they will be able to view the document immediately onscreen instead of having to download it and open it in another application.


    stretcher.gif
    fileinfotxt.gif
    This file shows the information screen for a text document named contract1.txt. The topmost links under the folder/file path are VIEW and EDIT.

    View allows you to see the document as the student will see it.
    Edit will allow you to make and submit changes.

    Both HTML and Text files also have options to make the document either the course announcement or the course syllabus.

    They also both allow you to add the document to a packet without having to first go through the Packet Modify steps.

    One thing you can do only with a Text file is convert it to another object. So if you had the file for a practice test saved, you could convert it to a quiz or exam without uploading it again. Obviously this will only work if the syntax of the files are similar, such as exams, quizzes, worksheets and practice tests.

    The rest of the links shown in the example are pretty self-explanatory, although complete directions are given in respective sections of this Help Center...i.e., Common Folders, API Links, etc.




    Application Documents


    stretcher.gif
    This file shows the information screen for Word file named
    Packets-Advanced.doc. Unlike the text or HTML files discussed above, there is no EDIT or VIEW link to this file. That is because the document needs to be downloaded to be viewed, and then revisions need to be re-uploaded.

    You can make the uploaded document the course syllabus, and you can do the general email/move/copy functions. However, think of files created in third-party applications as being stored in Educator, but not editable or viewable as a rule.

    fileinfodoc.gif





    Image documents


    stretcher.gif
    fileinfogif.gif
    This file shows the information screen for an image file named packeticon2.gif.

    There are a couple of things that you can do with an image file that you can't do with other files. One is to display the picture in your syllabus area. This means you can upload your own photograph in .gif, jpg or png format and check the checkmark to autmatically display on the syllabus access page.

    Another thing you can do is copy it to the skins. This may be more of an administrator function, but occasionally an instrutor will upload a unique image and use it as one of the navigation buttons or heading image.


    In the filename dialog box toward the bottom of the page, there is a textbox with a place to put ALT tag text. An ALT tag is what displays either as a tooltip, when a mouse hovers over an image, or when images are turned off. This is an important accessiblitiy issue, and if you have viewers with vision problems who may be using alternate forms of browsers, it's good to get into the habit of supplying ALTernate text for images that you use.



    Flash Movie Files


    stretcher.gif
    This file shows the information screen for a text document named glossaryembed.swf. Like a third-party application file, it cannot be edited or viewed directly in Educator until it is downloaded to the local computer. However, like an HTML or Text document, it can be made submittable. This means that you can create Flash quizzes or questions that can be scored (automatically) and tracked by the Gradebuilder.

    You can also specify the height and width of the screen that displays the movie by putting in the values where specified in pixels.

    fileinfoflash.gif


    General Information about File Sizes


    Educator can easily accept uploads of files up to 10 MB. Files larger than that should either be zipped or chunked into more manageable pieces.

    Before you compress or 'zip' a folder, especially if it contains Powerpoint or Word filetypes
  • make sure you reduce any graphics to a manageable display size before including them in the document. Don't rely on the browser to 'squeeze' them into the right size. No matter how small they look onscreen, unless they are actually reduced, they'll still be large files.
  • Convert graphic file types to .gif images if necessary. Other file types are usually much larger.

    To reduce picture sizes or change the file format to .gif, you'll need to use a graphics program like Paint (a Windows Accessory program), Illustrator, PhotoShop orPaintShop Pro.
    Once you've optimized the contents of a file folder, make sure it compresses to under 10 MB when you zip it. Otherwise, you'll have to segment the information into smaller chunks in order to upload it.

    tip.gifTIP: After uploading a zipped folder into Educator, you can choose the option to form a packet when you unzip it.

    caution.gifCaution: Make sure that you don't use special characters or spaces in filenames. Because you're moving from the Windows or MAC OS environment to a web environment, you need to be careful how you name files. Get into the habit of using alpha or numeric characters or hyphens and underscores (- _). Other characters, such as ? # @ % & and many others are reserved for use in programming code and will cause problems when unzipping the files.



  • Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    3.4.1) Compressing -zip- Files

    If you prefer to work offline, creating documents for your online courses, you can zip them into a compressed file and upload them to Educator. You can then choose to unzip the contents into Educator packets.

    First create the files and save them to your computer.

    Second, create a compressed folder on your computer (see sidebar).

    Third, drag the files into the compressed folder.

    Now you're ready to upload them into Educator or save them to your desktop.

    TO CREATE A ZIPPED COMPRESSED FOLDER ON A PCÖ

    • RIGHT-CLICK THE DESKTOP
    • SELECT NEW
    • SELECT COMPRESSED (ZIPPED) FOLDER.
    • DRAG FILES TO THE COMPRESSED FOLDER TO COMPRESS THEM.
    zipicon.gifYOU CAN SOMETIMES IDENTIFY COMPRESSED FOLDERS BY THE ZIPPER ON THE FOLDER ICON.





    To work with these files offline double-click the folder and unzip the file.
    To do that, do NOT open the contents. However, in the left column of your folder task area (on the PC), you should see a task called Extract all Files. Click on this.

    Depending on your browser and computer configuration, an unzip utility will open. Follow the directions for extracting the files. In any case, click NEXT if it seems like nothing is happening. You should see a progress bar if extraction is taking place.

    Once the action is completed, click [Finish]

    Your files will be uncompressed and ready for edit within the folder. You may then save and compress if you wish to upload your revised work as demonstrated in the beginning of this article.

    If you are using an older version of Windows, or a Macintosh, you may have to get a utility such as Winzip (for Windows) or Stuffit Deluxe for the Mac before you can do the activities described above.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    3.5) Adding/Uploading Resources


    The Upload Center serves as a place from which to upload or create documents for your course.
    The Upload Center is a sublink under the Course Materials main navigator link.


    QuickStart Directions

    Documents here refer to static course materials that generally contain text, images and hyperlinks. For specific objects such as exams or assignments, see the appropriate Help Center sections for uploading directions.
    There are two ways to create general documents in Educator: manually or via file upload.

    Method One: Manually creating a document


    • Click the Course Materials main navigator link
    • Click the Upload Center sublink
    • Choose a folder in which you wish to store the document.
    • Select Manually Enter a Text or HTML File.
    • Add file information.
    • Type or paste content into the text area.
    • [SUBMIT]
      documentmanuallycreate.gif



    Method Two: File Upload

    • Prepare a document offline and save it
    • Click the Course Materials main navigator link
    • Click the Upload Center sublink
    • Choose a folder in which you wish to store the document
    • click on [Browse]
    • Locate the saved file on your drive
    • Highlight the file
    • Click on the [Open] button (This will make the filename appear in the Browse input box)
    • Click [Upload File!]

    Note: Filenames should contain nothing but letters, numbers, dashes and underscores.
    Filenames must have a file extension or they will be rejected.
    Files over 10 MB in size will be rejected.
    Details

    After your file has been uploaded, you will see a screen with file options and information.

  • VIEW FILE
  • EDIT FILE

  • MAKE THIS THE COURSE ANNOUNCEMENT

  • MAKE THIS THE COURSE SYLLABUS

  • EMAIL FILE
  • REMOVE FILE

  • COPY TO OTHER FOLDER

  • MOVE TO OTHER FOLDER

  • COPY TO COMMON FOLDER

  • COPY TO CONTENT EXCHANGE

  • COPY TO STUDENT
  • BUILD OBJECT LINK
  • BUILD API LINK
  • documentupload.gif


    The most commonly used functions are:
    Object ID:This is the file identifier used by Educator. It is used to embed objects into other course areas.
    ViewThis allows you to view the finished document. Only HTML and text files can be directly viewed. Other documents must be opened in the application used to create them.
    Edit:This opens an edit page where HTML and text documents can be revised.
    Remove, Move,
    Copy file
    These are self-explanatory functions for file management.

    An object ID number will be assigned to the file. You may then copy and paste the generated object ID tag into any other document within the course, creating a link between the two. The object ID tag is made up of two brackets with command language between:
    < object:123 >

    Tips!
    tip.gif For information about making your file a popup or embedding it directly into another document, see the Help Center Topics:
  • Object ID Numbers
  • Building Links in Content.

    tip.gif Always try to save your content in a format that will insure it is as small and transportable as possible

    tip.gif Remove files that no longer need to be in Educator

    tip.gif Educator will reject any file it determines may contain a virus

    tip.gif When delivering non web-viewable content, consider delivering it to your students in a zipped or compressed format to conserve system space

    tip.gif Do not upload files that contain non-alphanumeric characters such as pound signs, parentheses, and other characters used commonly in computer commands. These files will be rejected and in certain instances, may corrupt your Object ID database

    tip.gif Please do not use Educator as a storage warehouse for your files. This is not what Educator is designed for. Ucompass will request that excessively large amounts of files not being accessed by learners be removed.

  • Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com




    3.5.1) Object ID Numbers

    An Object ID is a file identifier used by Educator. It is used to link pages together or embed objects into content areas.

    QuickStart Directions

  • Find the object ID number of any educator object
    (In the example at right, the object ID number is 40)
  • copy and paste or type the tag into a document
    If the object ID refers to an image file, Educator will display the image.
    If the ID refers to a document, the Educator will create a link to the document

  • if you wish to add custom text for the user to click on, add two colons and then type the text:
    < object:40::Click here >

    Otherwise the filename will be used as the link
  • documentupload.gif


    Details
    Every resource added to Educator is stamped with its own unique Object ID Number. Object ID Numbers serve multiple purposes in Educator but their primary purpose is to provide a way to link from one part of the course to any of your other learning objects.

    The first resource you add to your Course Management System receives an Object ID Number of 1 and your Object ID Database builds sequentially from that point forward.

    No two resources in any of your courses should ever have the same Object ID Number and an Object ID Number will never be repeated.

    All uploaded and evaluation learning objects receive Object ID Numbers including exams, quizzes, surveys, worksheets, etc.

    How do I find the Object ID Number of a resource?

    When you modify a learning object, that resource's Object ID Number will be displayed. Also, you can click on the Educator Explorer icon explorericon.gif to open up a small window that will display the paths to all your resources in all your courses. This is a quick and easy way to locate an Object ID Number:

    explorer.gif

    How do I use Object ID Numbers to form links?

    There are some basic techniques to learn about constructing Object ID links. Object ID links can be embedded into any part of Educator where text can be entered.

    All Object ID links are structured in the following format:

    <object:#>


    Where # refers to the Object ID Number of the linked object.

    For instance, in our screen capture above, if we wanted to embed the selected multimedia which has an Object ID Number of 63, we could embed the command: <object:63>.

    Another way...Object ID Link Builder

    All of the above explains the syntax for configuring an object ID tag, but there is so much to remember! You don't have to remember the syntax for building an object ID tag if you use the Object ID Link Builder instead.

  • Click on the Toolbox Icon toolbox.gif at the bottom of most Educator pages.

  • Choose the Object ID Link Builder link.
    A popup will open listing all of your folders.

    objectIDbuilder.gif
  • Type in the object ID of the document you wish to link from this screen, or, if you donít know the ID number, open the folder that contains that document.
    If you open a folder, click on the file that you wish to link.

  • Choose from the display options of Link, Embed or Popup.
    If you choose Link, your object ID tag will produce a link to the document.
    If you choose Embed, your object will be embedded within the document.
    If you choose Popup, the document will open in a popup window.

  • Type in the Custom text in the box provided. In the above example, for instance, you may want to replace the File Label "About your Project" with "Important Information! Click Here!"

  • Click on the [Form Code] button.
    The next screen will display a correctly formatted tag that can be highlighted, copied and pasted into your document.



    Object ID Link Attributes

    Depending on the type of resource you are linking to, you can assign attributes to your Object ID Link. The attribute scheme of an Object ID Link is shown below:

    <object:#:Display Option:Custom Text:Variables:Target:Width of Popup:Height of Popup:Image Reference:Resizable:Scrollbars: Toolbar:Status:Menubar>

    Following is an explanation of each attribute:

    Display Options

  • Popup: You can force certain types of content to open in a popup window. For instance, if we wanted Object 63 in the above capture to be opened in a Popup window, our Object ID link could be modified as follows: <object:63:popup>. The Popup Display Option will only work with HTML, Text, GIF, JPG, Shockwave, QuickTime or AVI file formats.

  • Embed: You can embed HTML or Text resources directly into the part of the program you are working using the embed display option. If we had an HTML Resource that had an Object ID Number of 84, we could structure our Object ID Link as follows: <object:84:embed> and the content of Object 84 would be embedded into whichever part of Educator we are working. Embed is the default display option for GIF, JPG, Shockwave, QuickTime and AVI resources.

    Custom Text

    You can customize the link in your Object ID link by entering in a value into the Custom Text field.

    If we wanted to give learners a link to the Energy and Heat movie from the above capture and we just formed the link as <object:63> then the link would be to the filename, energyandheat.swf. However, if we wanted to customize that link, we could format our Object ID link as follows: <object:63::Movie about Energy and Heat!>

    Notice that there are TWO colons between the Object ID Number and our Custom Text. This is because the Display Option is blank. The Custom Text field is always found after the third colon in an Object ID command and if you are not using a display option, then the Display Option field is blank. Each time you leave out an attribute, you must leave in the intervening colons.

    Variables

    This field lets you send values into an Educator CGI script. Values are separated by commas. This is only useful when the object ID command points to a CGI function.

    Target

    You can specify the name of the window a resource should load to - default is _top.

    Height/Width

    If you are using the popup Display Option or if you are embedding a Shockwave, QuickTime or AVI resource, you can specify the Height and Width of the movie playing area that is created upon executing your link. The Height and Width are in pixels. For example, if we wanted our Object 63 movie from above to open in a 550 pixel wide x 400 pixel high player we could format our Object ID command as follows: <object:63:popup:Movie about Energy and Heat!:::550:400>

    Image Reference

    You can form an object ID link and use an image as the clickable link instead of text. Simply type in the object ID number of the image you wish to use.

    The following attributes are used with the popup display option only:

  • Resizable (yes or no)

    Controls the user's ability to resize popup windows.


  • Scrollbars (yes or no)

    Controls the ability to have scrollbars in popup windows.


  • Toolbar (yes or no)

    Controls the ability to have a toolbar in popup windows.


  • Status (yes or no)

    Controls the ability to have page status displayed in popup windows.


  • Menubar (yes or no)

    Controls the ability to have a menubar in popup windows.





    Object ID Table

    Use the following table as a reference when forming Object ID links:

    File Type Popup Option Custom Text
    HTML
    Text
    popup
    embed
    Supported
    GIF
    JPG
    Shockwave
    QuickTime
    AVI
    popup Supported
    All Others None Supported


    Using an Object Command to link to a function

    Each action you perform in Educator from signin in to logging off is actually running a CGI (Common Gateway Iinterface) process on the server where Educator is hosted.

    You may notice that every click you make in Educator takes you to a different URL. Notice an example of this in the illustration below:

    objects1.gif

    Each link in Educator points to a specific CGI file. In the example above, the CGI is discussionboard.cgi and that points to the entry page of Educator's Discussion Board feature.

    You can take the name of the CGI file, drop the .cgi and build an object command from it. For example, you could form the following command:

    <object:discussionboard::Go the the Discussion Board!>

    This WILL NOT work with all locations in Educator. However, you can look up the correct syntax for CGI objects by referring to the Educator Function Finder located in the Course Explorer (Click on the magnifying glass icon).

    explorer2functionfinder.gifThis will display functions within two major categories: Learner and Instructor;
    stretcher1.gif
    within those categories are four subcategories: communication, content, evaluation and management.

    Under that you'll see the functions themselves. The URL is the CGI syntax that you need to create generic links.


    So if you wanted to find out how to send a student a link to the chat logs, but you didn't know the syntax, you would
  • Click on the explorericon.gif explorer icon.
  • Click on Educator Function Finder
  • Click on Learner Functions
  • Click on Communication Functions
  • Scroll down to Subclass Chat, where you'll see the URL is chatlogs. This is the CGI object name that you need to create your generic link.

    At this point you can formulate your object ID tag:

    <object:chatlogs>


    If you want to link to a specific sublocation, it gets a little more complex as you'd need to pull some variable information from the URL and transmit it in the Height and Width fields of the Object ID command. E-mail support@ucompass.com for more information on this specialized procedure.


    Popular CGI Object Commands

    <object:syllabus::Custom text> --> syllabus
    <object:coursematerials::Custom text> --> teacher:Course Materials
    <object:announcements::Custom text> --> announcements
    <object:discussionboard::Custom text> --> discussion board
    <object:quizzes::Custom text> --> Quizzes
    <object:exams::Custom text> --> exams
    <object:guestwebsites::Custom text> --> External Links
    <object:mailbox::Custom text> --> mailbox
    <object:chatroom::Custom text> --> chatroom
    <object:students::Custom text> --> students
    <object:surveys::Custom text> --> surveys
    <object:technicalsupport::Custom text> --> Technical Support
    <object:assignments::Custom text> --> Assignments
    <object:manager::Custom text> --> Course Manager
    <object:gradereport::Custom text> --> Grade Report
    <object:sendmessage::Custom text> --> Send Mail
    <object:logoff::Custom text> --> Logoff

    The Object ID Repair Program

    If you ever notice that more than one resource in your course(s) has the same Object ID Number or if you notice a resource that is missing an Object ID Number, this is a sign that your Object ID Database may be unstable.

    We recommend you investigate this by clicking on the Educator Toolbox icon toolbox.gif then clicking on the Object ID First Aid Kit icon firstaid.gif.

    View your Object ID Database and if you see a lot of errors, you may want to schedule an Object ID Repair Job to help stabilize your Object ID Database:

    firstaid2.gif

    An unstable or damaged Object ID Database can lead to problems with all aspects of your course(s) including grade builder functions, packets and links to internal Educator resources.

  • Tips!
    tip.gif For images or documents used by many courses, use the Common Folders instead of course folders. That way, changes to the document only have to be made once to the common folder document, and will be instantaneously evident in each course using that document.

    caution.gif Educator will copy objects embedded within documents and assign new object ID numbers automatically if a course is copied or cloned. However, if you copy the code containing object ID tags from one course to another, the link or image will appear to be broken to the student because the object belongs to a course to which the student does not have access.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com




    3.5.2) Linking Course Pages

    Linking Pages Summary Sheet: A compendium techniques for linking course pages together, linking to external resources, and embedding image files into courses.


    Because there are directions for linking internal and external pages to your course pages in several locations in this tutorial, depending upon the type of links, this page serves as a concise summary of the syntax used in each situation.

    Object ID numbers are generally used when linking internal course documents or files together.

    Examples using Object ID numbersSyntaxExample

    basic

    <object:#>

    <object:123>

    basic with custom text

    <object:#::text>

    <object:123::Click Here>

    with custom text and set to open in new window
    <object:#::text::_new>
    <object:123::Click Here ::_new>

    specifying popup display, custom text, setting width and height of popup

    <object:#:popup:text:::width:height>


    <object:123:popup:Click Here:::500:400>

    to embed one file into another

    <object:#:embed>

    <object:123:embed>
    with display, and image used as hotlink
    <object:#:::::::#>

    <object:123:::::::140>

    All possible attributes:
    <object:#:display:text:variables:target:width:height;image ID;resizable:scrollbars:toolbar:status:menubar>



    Using an Object Command to link to a function

    Each action you perform in Educator from signin in to logging off is actually running a CGI (Common Gateway Iinterface) process on the server where Educator is hosted.

    You may notice that every click you make in Educator takes you to a different URL. Notice an example of this in the illustration below:

    objects1.gif

    Each link in Educator points to a specific CGI file. In the example above, the CGI is discussionboard.cgi (circled) and that points to the entry page of Educator's Discussion board feature.

    You can take the name of the CGI file, drop the .cgi and build an object command from it. For example, you could form the following command:

    <object:discussionboard::Go the the Discussion Board!>

    This WILL NOT work with all locations in Educator. If you want to link to a specific sublocation, it gets a little more complex as you'd need to pull some variable information from the URL and transmit it in the Height and Width fields of the Object ID command. E-mail support@ucompass.com for more information on this specialized procedure.

    Popular CGI Object Commands

    <object:syllabus::Custom text>
    <object:coursematerials::Custom text>
    <object:announcements::Custom text>
    <object:discussionboard::Custom text>
    <object:quizzes::Custom text>
    <object:exams::Custom text>
    <object:practicetest::Custom text>
    <object:guestwebsites::Custom text>
    <object:mailbox::Custom text>
    <object:chatroom::Custom text>
    <object:students::Custom text>
    <object:surveys::Custom text>
    <object:technicalsupport::Custom text>
    <object:assignments::Custom text>
    <object:manager::Custom text>
    <object:gradereport::Custom text>
    <object:sendmessage::Custom text>
    <object:logoff::Custom text>


    HTML Tags can be used to link to external websites if you use the correct syntax and attributes.

    Examples using HTML tag syntaxExample

    basic link

    < a href=http://www.google.com>Google< /a >

    link that opens in new window

    < a href=http://www.google.com target=_new>Google< /a>


    Images

    Images are a special kind of link. Examples of using images via Object IDs and HTML tags appear below

    Example using Object ID number

    Syntax

    Example

    basic

    <object:#>

    <object:50>
    Note that there is no need to use the display option. An image is automatically embedded


    Examples using HTML tags generated by the Common Folder Upload

    Description

    Syntax

    Example

    basic

    <img src=path/filename>

    <img src=/educator/common/instructor/file.gif>

    aligning
    image to
    the left
    of text

    <img src=path/filename align=left>

    <img src=/educator/common/instructor/file.gif align=left>

    aligning
    image to
    the right
    of text

    <img src=path/filename align=right>

    <img src=/educator/common/instructor/file.gif align=right>



    Tips
    tip.gifBe careful when copying and pasting files from one course to another. It's best not to do this unless they are files from the common folders with associated HTML tags. Otherwise, files with Object IDs belong to the course in which they were created. Attempts to copy them manually to another course will result in broken links as students from the new course will not have permission to view them.
    See Common Folders in this Help Center.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com






    3.5.3) Automatic Add Object Creator



    Automatic Add Object Feature:
    A fast automatic object id link creator that can be used anywhere a text box appears in the Educator system.


    The Automatic Add Object Creator allows instructors or designers to create object id links anywhere in a course without needing to remember the object id number and code.

    Using the Add Object button, users can simply choose their object from the list of files and assessments in their course and Educator will do the work.

    Important Note: You must have pop-ups enabled to view the link window.

    To use the Automatic Object Id Creator, look for the Add Object button located under any of the text boxes in your course.

    addobject1.gif
    Once the Add Object button has been selected the following pop-up box will appear. This box will contain all of the course materials and folders within the Educator course.

    addobject2.gif

    Simply select your object from the box. The following window will appear once the file has been selected.

    addobject3.gif

    Enter the text you wish your students to see for the object link. If the name
    of the actual object is acceptable, you may leave the text box blank. Click OK. The link to the object will automatically appear in the text box.

    addobject4.gif





    Please send
    your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic. Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    3.5.4) Uploading PowerPoint presentations



    Powerpoint Presentations (PPT files) may be uploaded into Educator if the file size is less than 10 MB. To ensure that your file stays as small as possible, make sure to reduce your images to the smallest usable file size and use the .gif image file format. These things must be accomplished in a graphics program such as Paint, PhotoShop, PaintShopPro, Illustrator or the like. Also, avoid 'PowerPoint Bloat' by saving your file using the SAVE AS... option. Or choose the following browser menu options
    Tools >Options>Save
    and remove the checkmark next to Fast Saves.. Then save the presentation with a new name.

    Keep in mind that in order for your students to view these presentations, they'll either need PowerPoint on their computer, or the Microsoft PowerPoint viewer which is free for downloading by PC users. They need to be careful which version they download, however--it must match the version of PowerPoint you created the presentation on. This viewer cannot be obtained by students who use Apple Computers.

    An alternative strategy can be to convert the PowerPoint to HTML. This is not perfect as there are often formatting losses in the conversion, but at least all users are able to see the resources.
    To do this:

    1. Click on the FILE menu in Powerpoint where you should see an option to Save as HTML or Save as Web Page. (Save the file to your desktop)
    2. Open up the folder that PowerPoint creates on the computer desktop and locate the opening page of the PowerPoint presentation that has been converted to an HTML file. It will have an .html or .htm extension.
    3. Rename it index.htm
    4. Select all the files in the folder and zip them into one compressed folder. The file name should end with a .zip extension once compressed.
    5. Upload the .zip file into Educator
    6. Educator will present you with an UNZIP link.
    7. Upon following that link, choose the option that reads Deflate to a website.
    8. Because an index.htm file automatically loads into a browser, the first page of the PowerPoint presentation will display when the file is accessed.
    TO CREATE A COMPRESSED FOLDER ON A PC XP OS
    • RIGHT-CLICK THE DESKTOP
    • SELECT NEW
    • SELECT COMPRESSED (ZIPPED) FOLDER.
    • DRAG FILES TO THE COMPRESSED FOLDER TO COMPRESS THEM.
    zipicon.gifYOU CAN IDENTIFY COMPRESSED FOLDERS BY THE ZIPPER ON THE FOLDER ICON.

    Essentially, the PowerPoint-to-HTML conversion simply converts the PowerPoint to a website, so deflating to a website in Educator lets a compressed group of files preserve its original directory structure.


    Usage Tips

    tip.gif Remember your students using dial-up connections. Make sure any images you include in your presentations are reduced to the smallest usable file size. Don't just make them look small in Powerpoint--make sure you use .gif file formats and reduce the actual dimensions of the image on your screen. You need a graphics program like Paint, PhotoShop, Paintshop Pro or Illustrator with conversion utilities in order to do this.
    (Note: The latest version of PowerPoint has a built-in compression feature to help reduce images. Right-click an image and choose Format >AutoShape. Click the Picture tab and press [Compress]. Change the resolution to Web/Screen and then click [Apply] to make the change in all of the images in your presentation. Click [OK] and then resave the presentation.

    tip.gif Every time you saved your presentation using the SAVE command, you added extraneous formatting to your file. Get rid of this by doing a final "Save As..." when you are ready to upload the presentation. Files must be less than 10MB in order to upload correctly.

    tip.gif In order to save file size and to ensure clarity among your students, make sure you 'talk around' your PowerPoint presentation by adding narration or by including a separate hadnout version that includes additional information, much as you would deliver if making the presentation in person.

    tip.gif If you are using an older version of Windows, or a Macintosh, you may have to get a utility such as Winzip (for Windows) or Stuffit Deluxe for the Mac before you can do the activities described above.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com




    3.5.5) Importing from other Platforms



    Special Object Import: Educator has the ability to import materials created by other course platforms or third-party programs and convert the syntax into one that is usable by the Educator system.


    QuickStart Directions


    Note: Before you begin, you must have a file generated in one of the supported software systems such as Blackboard IMS, WebCT, or Respondus. See footnote 1 for the current, but ever expanding list.
    The first time you attempt this, especially if you are importing an entire course, please do it in a test course environment as it will unzip course materials directly into course object areas (such as exams, quizzes, etc) and create new folders.
    • Click on the Course Materials main navigation link.
    • Click on the Upload Center sublink.
    • Scroll down past the folders and click the link that reads: Upload educator object.
    • Browse your computer drive for the saved file generated by another software program.
    • Highlight and Open the file so that the file name is visible in the FILE: field.
    • Choose the appropriate file type.
    • Click [Upload File]
    Choose one of the following situations:

    If this is an entire course import from another platform such as Blackboard or WebCT, you will be asked to set preferences such as
    _ Purge empty course folders
    _ Make packets from course folders
    _ Spider manually created folders
    _ Load assessments as exams or quizzes
    _ Content status: locked or unlocked.
    Educator cannot change the status from document to document. They must all be locked or they must all be unlocked.

    Note that Educator cannot create things that weren't in the original. For example, unless course folders in the old course were arranged by topic, Educator cannot create topical packets when importing and arranging the materials.
    Once you have set all of the preferences, click on [Convert IMS content].
    If you are importing a large course, this may take several minutes to complete. Your browser will not be responsive, nor able to do other tasks.



    If this is an assessment from a third-party program such as Respondus or Exam View, then Educator will recognize the syntax and convert it to the corresponding Educator syntax.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com




    1Currently supported LMS platforms include Blackboard, WebCT

    . Third party vendors include ExamView, Respondus, CoolSchool




    3.6) Audio/Video and Podcasting

    Audio/Video and Educasterare new features in Educator (in Beta as of April 1, 2006) that lets users record an audio or video into their Educator account. This feature also allows you to create a podcast of that audio/video file which is then accessed through iTunes. No special equipment is needed other than an ordinary sound input (and web camera for video).

    IMPORTANT NOTE: The user's browser must have the Flash Player, Version 7 or later, to use Educaster and the Audio/Video tools.

    To start, make sure you have your microphone and camera plugged in to your computer. Scroll to the bottom of any main Educator page and find the horizontal tool bar. Click on the Toolbox icon.

    pod1.gif

    Choose Audio/Video Controls from the window that pops up.

    In this window, you may choose to turn on Audio/Video for your entire course or you may leave the box unchecked. By leaving the checkbox empty, only you as an instructor will have recording capabilities. By checking the box, you and your students will have added links beneath any text box in the system with which you may record audio or video.

    pod3.gif

    If you do not choose to open the audio/video tools to your students, you will always be able to access them from the Toolbox.

    Click on the link for the tool you wish to use. Audio can currently be recorded for up to 12 minutes for each file. Video can currently be recorded for up to 3 mins per file. Once you click on the tool, you will see the following window.

    pod6.gif

    Choose Accept to allow the server to connect to your webcam and/or microphone.

    NOTE: If you are not allowed access, please make sure Port 1935 is opened on your firewall.

    In the filename field, type a short name for your file. You may use alphanumeric characters only. Spaces are allowed. Click Start Recording when you're ready.

    pod7.gif

    You should see the recording time moving. When you have finished, click Stop Recording. If you do not see the blue volume indicator bar moving while recording, please make sure you're speaking directly into your microphone and that you're speaking clearly and loudly.

    You will then have various choices to make.

    pod9.gif

    You may wish to preview your file first or simply save the file. If there is a problem and you wish to start over, simply click Discard. If you close this window prior to clicking the Save button, you will lose your work.

    Once you've saved your file, you will be given choices. You may:
    • Play: Play the file again

    • Discard: Delete the file

    • Make Link: Create a link which will be used so users may access the file

    • Close: Leave the Audio/Video area (make sure you save first!)

    • Clear: Clear the information for that file


    pod10.gif

    When you save your file, you will be given the following window IF you have not chosen to open the audio/video tools to your students. Otherwise, the link will automatically be embedded in whatever text box you're currently viewing.

    pod11.gif

    If you see this box, copy the link that shows in that window. Go to the area in which you would like to embed the link and paste.

    The code will appear as follows:

    pod14.gif

    Your users will then see the following in the textbox in which you embedded the file.

    pod15.gif

    PODCASTING:

    If you would like to make your recording a podcast to be accessed in iTunes, before you close the recording window, click the "Make Podcast" checkbox. You will then see a screen telling you this may take several minutes.

    pod12.gif

    Click OK to start the process. Once the process has completed, your file will have a new icon which looks like an iPod.

    In order for someone to access your Podcast, they need the following:

    A valid Educator username and password
    The free software from Apple, iTunes, which is available for both Macs and PCs.
    Within iTunes, from the menu bar, choose "Advanced", and then "Subscribe to Podcast".

    The subscription URL will be:

    http://podcasting.ucompass.com/subscribe?publisher=educator-username@educator-login-url

    So for instance, if your username is jsmith@educator.myschool.edu, your Podcasting subscription URL will be:

    http://podcasting.ucompass.com/subscribe?publisher=jsmith@educator.myschool.edu

    iTunes will then ask you for a username and password. The username the user subscribing to your Podcast must enter should be in the form of their own Educator login as educator-username@educator-login-url. The password entered should be their normal password used to access Educator.

    pod16.gif

    Once the username and password are accepted, the Podcasts will download to iTunes and you can then sync the Podcast onto your iPod or other mobile media device.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to
    for inclusion in this topic. Note: Technical support questions should
    be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    3.7) Using Existing Media Files for Podcasting

    Educaster and Your Existing Files...You can now take your existing Media files uploaded in Educator and easily convert them to Podcasts.


    IMPORTANT NOTE: The user's browser must have the Flash Player, Version 7 or later, to use Educaster and the Audio/Video tools.

    To start, upload your media files to the course folder you wish to use. The file types that will convert to Podcasts are mp3, mp4, mov, m4a, m4v. (It will likely be expanded to include wav and aif in the near future.)

    newpod3.gif

    Once your file is uploaded, you will see:

    newpod2.gif

    Simply check the checkbox next to "Make Available as Podcast" and submit the change. Once you see "Submitted.Thank you", the file will be available in iTunes.

    newpod1.gif

    For instructions on logging in to iTunes, please see below.

    PODCASTING:

    In order for someone to access your Podcast, they need the following:

    - A valid Educator username and password
    - The free software from Apple, iTunes, which is available for both Macs and PCs.
    - Within iTunes, from the menu bar, choose "Advanced", and then "Subscribe to Podcast".

    To download iTunes, click here. Once the software is installed, Go to "Advanced/Subscribe to Podcast".

    The subscription URL will be:

    http://podcasting.ucompass.com/subscribe?publisher=educator-instructor-username@educator-login-url

    So for instance, if your username is jsmith@educator.myschool.edu, your Podcasting subscription URL will be:

    http://podcasting.ucompass.com/subscribe?publisher=jsmith@educator.myschool.edu

    Your students will use the information above to login to the general podcasting area. iTunes will then ask for a username and password. The username the user subscribing to your Podcast must enter should be in the form of their own Educator login as educator-username@educator-login-url (ie mjones@educator.myschool.edu). The password entered should be their normal password used to access Educator.

    pod16.gif

    Once the username and password are accepted, the Podcasts will download to iTunes, you can play them from iTunes or sync the Podcast onto your iPod or other mobile media device.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to
    for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    3.8) FlexTV

    FlexTV: FlexTV is a new feature in the Ucompass.com, Inc. Educator Learning Management System designed to help students and teachers find television programming where they live that is supplementary or complimentary to the subject material of their courses.


    NOTE: FlexTV is a Flash application. You need the latest version of the Flash Player from Adobe. Click the following link fo Adobe's website to download the latest version of the free Flash Player: Download latest version of Flash


    TO ACTIVATE FlexTV:

    FlexTV has its own CGI identifier called flextv. So you can either add a button to your navigation menu that is pointed at FlexTV:

    flex2.gif

    To Add the Link, go to Customize on your menu bar. (Remember, you will need to
    do this on both the Instructor and the Student views.)

    1. Type the word "FlexTV"

    2. Anything in this field should be deleted. The field should be blank.

    3. From the dropdown box, pick FlexTV.

    4. Scroll down and click Submit. Or, you can add an object link to flextv to an Educator content area: <object:flextv::FlexTV>

    Of course, if you need more specific instructions, you can e-mail one of our E-Learning Technicians at support@ucompass.com


    WHAT DOES FlexTV LOOK LIKE?

    Below you can see a sample screen
    capture of FlexTV. It shows a user taking a Meteorology course searching for television programming relative to the keyword, Climate.

    flex1.gif

    1. When you first access FlexTV, you'll be asked to input your zip code. Enter a five-digit zip code (currently only United States and United States territories are supported) then press the 'Go!' button. Each person would put in their own zip code.

    2. Then, you will see a list of all registered television service providers
    and cable operators assigned to your zip code. Simply click on the company you
    use as your television provider. Unfortunately, while our data is very complete, we may not have all providers in all parts of the country.

    3. Again, this student has searched for the word Climate in this instance.

    4. At first, you will see a grid that lists all of the current day's television programming, fast-forwarded to the current time of day. You can use the time pull-down interface controls to move forward or backward in half-hour increments. You can also use the calendar interface control to move ahead up to 2 WEEKS into the future to display television programming by time.

    5. There is also a drop down box that will provide terms the student can be provided by the instructor. To add appropriate terms, please add the terms to your Glossary in the course. (See Glossaries under Distributing Knowledge in the Online Help Manual)

    flex5.gif

    When you click on a TV program, you'll see something similar to the following:

    flex3.gif

    When you click on the name of a TV program, you'll see a dialogue that lets you click on the name of the program and (sometimes) the names of any actors/actresses in the program. When you click on these links, you'll see info within the FlexTV interface straight from the IMDB (Internet Movie Database):

    flex6.gif


    ADDING A TV PROGRAM TO THE COURSE CALENDAR

    Upon clicking on the name of a TV program, you'll see an "Add to Calendar" icon. Upon clicking this, the television program will be added to your Educator calendar. The students would then be prompted to watch the program you pointed out to them.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic. Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    3.9) Location-Based Learning

    Location-Based Learning allows you to tie activities and resources to specific locations on the Planet Earth. This is accomplished with a new feature in Educator that lets you easily insert Google Maps into ANY part of your Educator classrooms.


    NOTE: Certain versions of Internet Explorer seem to have particular difficulty with this new feature right now and it definitely doesn't work with Internet Explorer on the Macintosh. The feature works very well with Firefox, Safari and Netscape. Other browsers have not been tested yet but since the feature is built with the Google Maps program, if a browser can't successfully use Google Maps, it won't work with this particular feature in Educator.

    To start, scroll down to the bottom of any main Educator page and click the Toolbox icon on the horizontal icon bar. Once there, click Location-Based Learning to turn on the Tool.

    maptool2.gif

    maptool3.gif

    When you check the box to turn on the tool, an Add Map button will automatically be added to any text box in the course. Click on the Add Map button to add a map.

    maptool4.gif

    Center the map that appears on the general area you wish to map. To center the map, just place your mouse on the map and click and drag. You may then use the slider bar on the left to zoom in to the area until you find precisely the location you wish to map.

    maptool5.gif

    Once you find the desired location, click that point on the map. You will receive a box in which to fill in specific information about the item.

    maptool6.gif

    When you click OK, the link will automatically be embedded in the text box you currently have open. If you wish to use this link in other places in your course, just copy and paste that link.

    maptool8.gif

    When the students view the link, the map will appear with your notation on it when the Educator "e" icon is clicked.

    finalmap.gif

    Notice also on this link is the latitude and longitude of the mapped location. In addition to being able to insert maps into ANY Educator text box (e-mail, chat, etc.), all "resources" in Educator can be linked to a specific latitude and longitude down to the nearest meter using Google Maps. For instance, if you had a picture of a building that was part of a course lecture, you could tie an exact latitude and longitude to that resource to help learners' better grasp where on Earth that physical artifact is found:

    latlong.gif

    Our goal is to promote the use of Latitude and Longitude, where appropriate, as a key META data field for learning objects in Educator (and other educational systems). As these resources become more easily searchable with "Learning Object Repository" technology, and as GPS on cell phones becomes as commonplace as cameras are today, we envision an exciting model evolving such that when a learner comes within a given physical distance of an artifact they have learned about during their online studies, they will be sent a friendly message on their phones or PDAs with some information about that artifact and their proximity to it.

    phone.gif

    Dramatization: Actual notification feature coming in 2007


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    3.10) The Lone Rearranger

    The Lone Rearranger: Use this tool to rearrange, rename, or remove Exams, Quizzes, Worksheets, Assignments, Packets, Discussion Groups, and Tasksheets. You may rearrange or rename as many items as you wish in each session.

    This new rearrange tool has two features: 1) regardless of the number of assessments and/or students, you may rearrange assessments at any time and 2) the grades and work associated with the assessments (including discussion boards) will remain tied to that assessment.


    NOTE: You must have at least version 9 of Flash installed in your browser to use this program. To install Flash 9, or to make sure you have the latest version, you may go to Adobe's website to download the free player. Also, please make sure popup blockers are turned off.


    TO USE THE TOOL:

    Click on the Toolbox on the horizontal icon bar at the bottom of any main page in Educator. You may have to scroll down in order to see the icon bar.

    screenwelcome.jpg

    Click on the Toolbox to open it. (See the instructions at the bottom of the page to create a button to the Rearranger on the Instructor's navigation bar.)

    screentoolbox.jpg

    Once the window opens, it will show you the list of Tools. Scroll down to the bottom of the list and you will find The Lone Rearranger.

    When you click on the link, the following page will load.

    screen.jpg

    The page will show the course ID for the course you're working on although you may change it at any time by clicking the dropdown box in the upper left corner.

    Each of the boxes above will show you the assessments you have and the order in which they are currently set.

    screenactive.jpg

    When you click on a box (see above), it will become opaque so you can clearly see the items listed in the box. When you click on an item, it will be highlighted in blue and then turn white with the words highlighted in black. This will allow you to rename the selection.

    To rename the item, just start typing or click where you wish to add more to the name. To keep the change, simply click on another item. This will save the name you've given the file temporarily. To make the change final, you will need to click the button Save Changes in the lower left corner.

    NOTE: Remember not to use characters such as @, #, $, %, ^, *, etc. in your Label Names. Also, please do not use html code in the Label Name.

    TIP: If you make a mistake, you can simply click Start Over in the lower left corner. This button will revert EVERYTHING you have changed back during this session to its original name and location.

    screenrename.jpg

    To move a file, simply drag it to the desired location by holding down the left mouse button. The dark line which appears is where the file will be dropped when you release the mouse button.

    screenmove.jpg

    If you wish to PERMANENTLY remove an item, you may drag it to the Trash cell in the far right lower corner. Once the item is in the Trash cell, the only way you can remove it is to click Start Over.

    screentrash.jpg

    When you have finished making your changes, click Save Changes to finalize the new settings. To return to your course, click Return to Educator.

    TO ADD A BUTTON ON THE NAVIGATION BAR:

    Click Customize on your Navigation Bar. By default, you will be on the Instructor view of the Navigation Bar.

    NOTE: Please make sure your institution allows changes to the navigation bar at the Instructor level; you may not be able to overwrite the navigation bar, or it may be overwritten during a nightly process.

    Whereever you would like the button to appear, click Add Button (1).

    addbutton.jpg

    In the URL field, simply type exactly what you see above (2).

    Scroll down to the bottom of the page and click Submit.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic. Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    3.11) Content Management Navigation


    Whenever you are navigating through folders in Educator, you will see a content navigation path at the top of the screen. This gives you a visual idea of where in the folder structure you currently are.

    folderpath.gif


    For example, the path above tells you that the user is currently viewing a file record for the file named contract1.txt which is in a subfolder called Contracts which itself is inside a folder called Miscellaneous.

    The arrow at the head of all paths is a hotlink that takes you out of your current position and displays the main folder listing.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com






    3.12) Common Folders


    Common Folders: File folders that allow users to share educational resources within a single Educator community.
    The common folders feature is a sublink under the Course Materials main link.

    QuickStart Directions

    Creating and using Common Folders


    stretcher.gif
  • Click on the [Course Materials] main navigator link.
  • Click on the Common Folders sublink.
  • Click on the Create New Common Folder link.
  • Fill in the name
  • Fill in the description or comments if desired.
  • Check any access limits you would like to invoke (Details below)
  • Click [Submit] in order to create your folder.
    Common folders you create will appear alphabetically among any others created at this institution.
    Those you own will have an icon commonfolderownericon.gif designating your ownership.

  • commonfolders1.gif



  • Now let's place a file in the folder...
  • Find the common folder you just created and click it to open it.
  • From the options that appear, choose Upload to folder.
  • Click on the [Browse] button.
  • Search your local drive for a small text or image file.
  • Highlight the file by clicking on it and then click on the [Open] button.

    The file will appear in the File: box. If it does not, Click [Browse] again and continue from that step.
  • Click on the [Upload File!] button.
  • Find the hyperlink generated by Educator.
    < a href=/educator/common/Forte/document1.html >Link < /a >


    This link may be copied and pasted on any web page inside or outside of the course, creating a hyperlink back to this file. Simply replace the word Link with your own custom text.
    For additional information on common folders, please review the details section below. Later on, when we talk about image banks and sharing files, we will come back to the Common Folders.


    Details




    Limiting Access to Common Folders.


    It is possible to limit access to common folders to yourself, a single department, or students from one or more of your courses.
    Let's look at these options which are visible in the screen display above:bullet6.gifIf you would like to limit access to this folder to specific staff or members of a department, you may input a staff password and distribute it among those who should have access.
    commonfolderkeyicon.gif Folders you have secured will have a key icon.
    lockicon.gifOther community members will still be able to see the folder, however, it will be marked with a lock icon.

    bullet6.gifIf you would not like this folder to be visible to anyone but yourself, you may check the box to make the folder invisible.

    bullet6.gifYou may also choose to make the contents of this folder available to students by selecting the checkmark in front of one or all of your courses. Students in courses that you mark for access will have a common folder sublink in their Course Materials.




    Working with Common Folders.


    Common folders that you have created are marked with a little face icon. You may only delete or edit folders that you own.
    commonfolder2view1.gif
    commonfolder3view2.gif


    As facilitator of this course, I have created a common folder using my last name, Forte. The image at left shows what I see if I view the common folders in this account. Note that there is no ownership icon next to the Smith Folder.
    The image at right shows what Smith would see if he logged in and viewed the common folders. Note that some folders visible to the user at left are not visible to users on the right. That is because folders within the Forte common folder have been made invisible to other users.
    I can go into the Smith folder and copy the HTML link tag from any file he has left "open" to me. Or Smith can go into the Forte folder and use any file left there. Embedding these Educator-generated HTML link will provide users with a link to that file as long as the file is not moved or deleted.


    Clicking on a common folder will allow me to view the contents of the folder or manipulate the folder in various ways. Let's go over these options, one by one.
    commonfolders2manipulate.gif

    This screen image at left shows options for the owner of the folder. The options to edit or delete the folder will not appear to others.


    • Folder Settings: Click this to change the name, description or access parameters of a common folder.
      caution.gifChanging the name of a folder after it contains files will change the path of that file resulting in a broken link. For example, an image file that sits in a common folder called images may have a path like this:
      < img src=/educator/common/images/caution.gif >
      If I change the name of the images folder to pictures, the path of any link previously embedded in a course would still include the old folder name images and the file would not be found when the link was clicked.

    • Remove folder: Click this to delete a folder and all of its contents.
    • Upload to folder: Click this to upload a file to this common folder. At this time, multiple uploads are not supported.
    • Import folder: If you are in another person's common folder and wish to copy the contents to your own account, click here. You are importing the contents from another user's common folder into one of your own common folders. You will be asked to specify a destination common folder, so be sure you have one prepared to receive the files contained here. Note: only files are transferred to your account...not the common folder structure itself.
    • New subfolder: Click this to create a subfolder within this common folder.
    • Course sharing: Click here to change the access permissions for other users including students in your courses.





    Importing files from Common Folders.


    If you want to use a file that resides in another instructor's Common Folder, you may do so simply by clicking on the folder, clicking on the filename and then clicking on the IMPORT FILE link. Then choose the course folder in your course in which you want to store the file. That's all there is to it.
    However, be aware that once you import a file into your own course, the thing that made it 'common' is no longer valid. In other words, any changes you make to the file will only be visible to viewers in your own course. Changes made to the original will not take effect on your copy of the file.

    If you do not want others using your materials without your permission, please either lock your Common Folders or make them invisible to others. By the very act of putting materials into a Common Folder, you are agreeing to share them with anyone else at your institution.


    Main Points

    • Common folders store files that need to be accessed from multiple courses or even from outside the Educator environment.
    • Common folders are not usually visible to students, but can be set up so that students have access
    • Common folders and contents can be hidden from other users
    • Common folders and files can be password protected by the owner
    • Files stored in common folders can be imported and changed by any instructor unless they are stored in locked or invisible folders.



    Usage Tips
    tip.gifCommon folders do not collapse. So be careful of creating too many that will make navigation difficult. If you are going to share contents only among your own courses, make your common folders invisible to others.
    tip.gif Why Common Folders, an article from the Ucompass.com archives.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    3.13) Student Folders


    Student Folders: Area where students upload and store their course work. Instructors can also distribute materials to student folders. Student folders are a sublink under the main Course Materials link.

    QuickStart Directions

    To view student folder contents

  • Click the [COURSE MATERIALS] main link
  • Click the Student Folders sublink
  • Click on a student's name to view the contents of their folder
  • To open a file within a student's folder, click on the file name.

    To place a file into student folders

  • Click the [COURSE MATERIALS] main link
  • Click the Upload Center sublink
  • [Browse] for the file you wish to upload.
  • Highlight the file once you have located it on your computer drive, then click [Open]
  • Click on the [Upload File] button.
  • After the upload is complete, click on COPY TO STUDENT
  • Select the student folders into which you wish to copy the file.
  • Type a note to accompany the file if appropriate.
  • Click [Submit]

    Details

    The main purpose for the student folders is so that students have a private area where they can upload and store work that they have created for their online course. These files may be associated with specific assignments and therefore, instructors may enter student folders for the purpose of grading these file submissions. This is not the main method of grading assignments. See the Assignments Packet for additional information

    Instructors may also upload files to the student folders.
    Let's look at each of these scenarios below.

    studentfolders1.gif

    This image shows the screen upon entering the Student Folder sublink in the main navigator column.

    Each student folder is listed. If they have uploaded any files, the most recent will be visible outside the folder.

    To view all files uploaded by a particular student, you must enter their folder.

    To display all contents of all folders, click on Show all student files

    If you would like to download all student files and view them offline, click on Download folder to desktop.

    You can allow students to view the contents of each other's folders by changing the student folder settings at the top of the list. The default is locked. Unlocking this setting will allow you or the student to unlock each individual folder.


    Entering the student folder


    studentfolders2.gif

    Click on any student folder to view the contents.

    You will also be able to upload to the folder, modify the folder (unlock or lock it), or download the folder to your desktop so that you can view the contents when you are offline. This is useful for external assignments, such as word documents, that need to be open by an external application. (If you make any changes to the downloaded file, you must re-upload it again, for the changes to be visible to the student).

    Note that you or the student may also create subfolders. This is useful for segregating files that are all associated with a single assignment. That way, downloading the folder will only download pertinent files, and not all files.
    Note too, that instructor-loaded files are so designated.

    Each student file has an object ID number that begins with the letter "s". This number identifies the document within the system.



    Viewing a student file

    studentfolders3.gif

    Click on any file within a student folder to view that file. The first thing you will see is the file information page as shown to the left.

    If the file is web-viewable, you will have links that will allow you to VIEW or EDIT the file.

    If the file is not web-viewable, clicking on the filename will initiate a download to your desktop, where you may open the file with the appropriate application. The screen at left shows a non-web-viewable Word document (Oct.doc).

    The file information page indicates whether that file is or should be associated with an assignment. Changing the Association from NONE to a specific assignment will allow you to grade that file and provide assignment feedback to the student.

    If you would like to share the file with other students in the course, you may click on the link to Grant access to specific classmates/groups. (Groups will be explained in the discussion board area)

    The student grade report, which is accessible from this and many other locations, will be explained in the packet that deals with student evaluation and grading.



    Usage Tips

    tip.gifTo allow students to download and edit a single document, consider putting it in a common folder and then pasting the link in your lecture, assignment or discussion posting. Then if you need to edit the document yourself, you can make the change in one place and re-upload it with the same file name. The link won't change but the document will. The key is to keep using the same file name. If you want a record of the original documents, rename them document1.doc, document2.doc, etc. This is much easier than uploading a copy to each student folder. If changes have to be made once it's uploaded, you'll have to re-upload the changed document to each student again.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    3.14) Managing Student Files


    Student Files: Files uploaded to the Student folder--usually by the student, but also by the instructor. Student files are designated by an s preceeding the Object ID number.

    QuickStart Directions


  • Click on the Course Materials main navigation link.
  • Click on the Student Folders subfolder.
  • Click on an individual student name to enter the folder.
  • Click on the file that you wish to review.
    At this point, you can edit the file information, change the assignment association of the file, grade the file or add comments for the student to view.
  • [Submit] when you have finished editing the file information page.


  • Details


    studentfile1.gif



    Usage Tips
    tip.gif Give students directions for uploading their assignments from the assignment page itself, instead of directly into their folders. That way, the file uploaded will automatically be associated with that assignment, keeping the grading information straight.
    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    3.15) Course Syllabus



    Syllabus: Specific area of Educator where the course guide or syllabus is stored. It generally has its own main navigation link.


    Educator provides you with a special place for your Course Syllabus at the main syllabus link.

    When you access that part of Educator, you'll find an UPLOAD SYLLABUS link in the Educator Desktop area.

    When you upload a Syllabus file, it is automatically stored at this portion of the course, separate from your course folders, common folders and student folders.

    Your Syllabus file should be saved in either HTML or Microsoft Word format. Educator will optimize the delivery of your syllabus to learners depending on which of the two acceptable Syllabus formats you use.

    Your Syllabus file is one of the few learning objects in Educator that does not have an associated Object ID number, however consider that you can build an Object command that links directly to your Syllabus file with the following:

    <object:showsyllabus::Course Syllabus>

    Usage Tips
    tip.gifUpload your photo as a .gif or .jpg image into one of your course folders. Then choose the option to Display this picture in my SYLLABUS area.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    3.16) Packets

    Packets: An organizational tool that groups learning objects into portable, subject specific lessons. They allow instructors to control the sequence in which course materials are presented to the student. They provide a sense of organization to the student who finds all materials pertaining to a single lesson in one place.


    There are two methods for creating a packet. If your computer does not have the Macromedia Flash Player version 7, then follow the directions below labeled Original Method. If your computer has the Flash plugin loaded, then scroll down to the PacketMaster Flash-enhanced Method

    QuickStart Directions - Original Method
    • Click on Course Materials
    • Click on NEW PACKET in the control panel.
    • Name the packet
    • Enter comments about the packet. (optional)
    • Choose to have the packet (Locked or Unlocked.
    • Choose a display method (Slideshow or Textbook)
    • Place a checkmark next to all resources you wish to include in the packet.
    • Click [SUBMIT].
    • Number the packet items in the order you wish to present them to students.
    • Click [SUBMIT].


    QuickStart Directions --Packet Master-- Flash Version:
    Requires Flash Player version 7

    • Click on the Course Materials main navigator link
    • If necessary, click on the Packets sublink
    • Click on the "flash-enhanced" Packet Master link
    • Name your packet in the space provided on the right side of the form.
    • Select a resource that you wish to place into the packet from the list on the left and drag it to the new packet area.
    • Continue to drag and drop resources into the packet until the packet is complete. (To open a folder, click on the arrow next to it)
    • Click [Submit] to complete the packet.


    Details -- Original Method


    In our example, we are going to build a Packet from content in the Educator demonstration course on Meteorology. The course contains learning objects covering many different topics of Atmospheric Science. However, we want to build a consolidated unit that only covers the subject matter of Hurricanes.

    First, we locate the Packets link which is a sublink of the Course Materials Main Link. A Packet Control Panel will appear at the top of the next page.

    packets0.gif

    Click on NEW PACKET to create a new packet link.

    At that screen you may provide preliminary information about the packet:

    packets1.gif

    Packet Display Options

    You have the option of delivering content in one of two styles. Textbook Style displays content with a table of contents in a lefthand frame and the learning object file loading into a righthand frame. The second option for delivery is Slideshow Style. Slideshow Style provides content in such a manner that the Learner scrolls through each learning object slide by slide.

    Populating a Packet

    Once we give the Packet its name, status (Locked or Unlocked) and select its display options, we are ready to insert our Learning Objects into the Packet.

    Most file types can be inserted into Packets:

  • HTML/Text files
  • Word processing documents
  • Spreadsheets
  • Exams
  • Quizzes
  • Worksheets
  • Assignments
  • Surveys
  • Practice Tests
  • Tasksheets


    Next, a list displays all learning objects in our course that are eligible to be inserted into a Packet. Each learning object will have a checkbox next to its name. Simply check the learning objects that will go into the packet and scroll down and press the SUBMIT button:

    packets2.gif

    The next screen offers the opportunity to specify the order in which learning objects appear in the packet. You must click on [Submit] here even if the order as shown is correct. This last submission actually creates the packet.

    packets3.gif




    Details -- Flash-enhanced Method


    1. Click on the Course Materials main navigator link.

    2. If necessary, click on the Packets sublink.

    3. Click on the "flash-enhanced" Packet Master link.

    4. Name your packet in the space provided on the right side of the form as shown below.

    5. Choose a delivery style. Textbook Style displays content with a table of contents in a lefthand frame and the learning object itself loaded into a righthand frame. Slideshow Style provides content in such a manner that the Learner scrolls through each learning object slide by slide. (See example below)

    6. Set the status to locked (invisible to students) or unlocked (visible immediately to students).

      packetmaster02drag.gif

    7. Select a resource that you wish to place into the packet from the list on the left and drag it to the new packet area
      (.To open a folder, click on the pointer
      .To drag and drop, highlight the resource, holding down your mouse button while moving the mouse to the new location)


    8. Continue to drag and drop resources into the packet until the packet is complete.

    9. Click on [Submit] to save your selections.


    Note in the screen view shown below, various file types are indicated by the icon next to the file name. This example shows
    iconhtml.gifHTML document with a globe icon
    iconeducator.gifEducator objects with the Educator Logo icon
    iconadobe.gifPDF files with the Adobe logo icon
    iconword.gifWord document with the Microsoft Word icon and
    icontext.giftext document with a notepad icon.
    Educator can support dozens of file types that can be placed into packets. Please note that folders cannot be placed into a packet and while you can open a folder by clicking the arrow next to it, you would not be able to drag it to the packet area.


    If you wish to remove any items you have placed into the packet, click on the small trashcan icon at the top of the packet listing. Your packet contents will appear in a separate window where you can click on any item in order to remove it.

    packetmaster05delete.gif



  • Click the [Submit] when you have finished adding and removing objects in the packet.
    tip.gif You may not rearrange the items in the packet with this tool during the creation process unless you remove the item(s) and then replace it in a different order.


    Viewing the Packet as a Textbook Style

    If we choose to deliver our packet in Textbook Style, our newly formed Packet in Textbook Style would appear as follows:

    packets4.gif

    Viewing the Packet as a Slideshow

    If we choose to deliver our packet in a Slideshow Style, the program lets the user click through packet learning objects one slide at a time.

    packets5.gif



    Once a packet has been created, it will appear in a table along with several option links that will allow you to edit or manipulate the packet further.

    packets7table.gif

    These packet controls are covered in the next section, Advanced Operations.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    3.16.1) Advanced Operations



    Advanced Packet Operations
    Graduating from Folders to Packets


    Details

    If you are very familiar with building and managing packets, you might want to try your hand at some more advanced packet techniques. These techniques will assist you in the production of a highly individualized learning and teaching environment.

    Packet Settings

    When you view the table of packets, you'll notice a Settings option.

    packettablesettings.gif
    Click on Settings in order to view various otions that control each packet more tightly. You can have packet contents open up directly upon login, for example, if you wanted students to take a pretest before beinning a course. Or alternatively, you could allow only specific students to view a packet--for example if you wanted to give someone a makeup test.



    Packet Forcing


    packetsettingsforcing.gif
    When you force a Learner into a packet, the Learner is immediately dumped into the packet upon entering into the course.

    Forcing conditions can be applied to the entire course or to specific Learners.


    No Escape

    Normally, when a Learner enters a packet, there is a LEAVE PACKET link that takes them back to the course. When you place the No Escape mode on a Learner in a packet, the LEAVE PACKET link disappears and the learner is stuck in that packet unless you give them a link out of it with an Object ID command.

    The No Escape mode can be set for the entire course or for specific Learners.


    Unlock When Locked

    If you select Unlock for a specific learner, then that learner will be able to access the packet even if it is Locked for the rest of the course. This can create excellent individualized instruction opportunities.


    Stringing Packets Together

    Since a Packet is considered a learning object, it receives its own unique Object ID number. If you wish to create a large Packet with many, say 20 or 30 learning objects, consider forming two packets and placing an Object ID command linking the last resource in the first packet to the Object ID number of the second packet. Be sure that the second packet opens in a new window so that the navigation stays logical. Otherwise, you'll see two tables of content. To have the packet open in a new window, use the POPUP display syntax within the object ID tag:
    < object:123:popup:Packet 2 >


    For additional information regarding advanced object ID syntax, see the Lesson on Object IDs.


    Embedding non-HTML/Text files into a Packet

    Non-HTML files such as Word documents or GIF images can be included as packet items just like HTML documents. Once they have been uploaded to a course, they will be issued an Object ID number, and will appear as choices on the ADD/DELETE packet item page.


    Transferring Packets to the Common Folders

    This is an excellent way to modularize your instructional design and work on collaborative projects.



    Usage Tips

    tip.gif Many instructors use packet forcing and 'unlock when locked' to give makeup tests to students. Only the selected student can see the packet. However, remember that the grade for such a makeup must be manually input into the original test in order for the gradebook calculation to be correct.

    timesavericon.gifWhen transferring multiple files from one course to another, put them all into a single packet and click the COPY TO OTHER COURSE link. All files will be added to the correct place (Quizzzes, Exams, etc) and documents will be stored in a new Educator-generated folder called Copied Resources. See Additional Readings link.




    Additional Readings


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    3.17) Tasksheets

    Tasksheet: A simple listing that can provide descriptions for up to 100 student activities. Tasksheets provide an opportunity for student and instructor feedback, but no mechanism for uploading student work or tracking grades.

    QuickStart Directions


  • Click on the [Course Information] main navigation link
  • Click on the Tasksheets sublink
  • Click the New tasksheet link
  • Enter a name for your tasksheet and the number of tasks that should be created
  • Click on the Get Started button
  • Fill in the task titles, the time period that will be allowed and a description of each task.

  • Specify whether you wish the tasksheet to be visible (active) or not (inactive)
  • Click on [Submit]

    ...If you wish to embed this tasksheet within another document, create a tag using its object ID number: < object:123 >

    (See the section in this packet on Object IDs for details)

    ...If you would like to view the tasksheet from the students' point of view, click on the View link.

    ...If you would like to view student input for the tasks, click on the Students link. A listing of students will appear. If a student has entered comments, the comments/feedback link will be bold.

    Upon submission, a table listing all tasksheets will appear.

    Once you have created several tasksheets, you may manipulate them simultaneously by choosing the options beneath the table:
  • Rearrange tasksheets - to change the order in which they appear.
  • Tasksheet status control - to change their status (active or inactive) at one time.

    Details


    Tasksheets provide a function within Educator when the upload capabilities of more complex documents such as assignments or worksheets are not needed. Tasksheets provide a simpler mechanism for instructors to provide activity descriptions that students complete and either do not need to turn in, or turn in during a face-to-face classroom meeting.

    As with the rest of the evaluation learning objects in Educator, Tasksheets can be created online or uploaded from a text file created offline.

    Knowledge Providers can use the Tasksheets function in Educator to create a list of tasks for completion with correlating due dates or time periods. The Tasksheets sublink is found in the Navigation Panel under the Syllabus Main Link.

    As with the rest of the evaluation learning objects in Educator, Tasksheets can be created online or uploaded from a text file created offline.

    Below is an example of a Tasksheet created using an Educator template online:

    tasksheets1.gif

    The top image shows the instructor view...the second image below shows what the student sees.

    tasksheet2.gif

    Once the Tasksheet is created, Knowledge Providers have the opportunity to send Learners feedback about their performance on the specific tasks on a Learner by Learner basis. Knowledge Providers can locate the asynchronous Comments Feedback link by clicking on the Tasksheets sublink and then clicking on the Tasksheet that they want to review. The Knowledge Provider will see a list of the Learners in a table and the Comments/Feedback to the right of the Learners name will be in bold if the Learner has put in comments that relate to the Tasksheet.

    When the Knowledge Provider clicks on the COMMENTS/FEEDBACK link, he or she will see the following:

    tasksheets3.gif

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    3.18) Calculator


    Calculator: is an Educator function that calls up a scientific calculator which can be embedded linked into any document. It can be found by clicking the Toolkit icon in the Educator toolbar.

    QuickStart Directions

  • Click on the Toolkit icon in the Educator toolbar at the bottom of most Educator pages.
  • Click on the Calculator link in the list of tools that appears.
  • toolbox.gif

    Details


    toolbarcalculator.gif

    Besides the toolkit icon, the Educator calculator can also be embedded as a link within any Educator document. The syntax for embedding the link is:

    < object:calculator >

    It will appear to the student as a link that will open as a small popup.
    The link will embedded wherever you paste that object tag, even within the chatroom or discussion board.

    Usage Tips

    tip.gifIf you embed the calculator link into an exam, make sure that you tell your students in advance to disable any popup killers (computer utility programs that suppress popup windows) before entering the test.




    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    3.19) Glossaries

    Glossaries: Educator study aid that helps students review and even test themselves on course vocabulary. They can be created to support individual packets, or the whole course in a master Glossary. Glossary terms that are used within lectures or lessons can be made into links that display definitions when clicked.
    Glossaries are located in the Educator navigator column as a sub-link of Course Materials.

    QuickStart Directions

  • Click on the Course Materials main link in the navigator bar.
  • Click on the Glossaries sublink.
  • select create a new glossary.
  • Type the name of the glossary.
  • Choose Viewable or Archived.
  • [Submit].
  • Click on the name of the glossary that was just created.
  • Click ADD GLOSSARY TERM.
  • Enter the term and definition.
  • Click ADD ENTRY.
    Continue to add terms as above.


  • Details


    Glossaries are great little study aids that help students with course vocabulary. They can be created to support individual lessons or the entire course as a single master glossary.

    glossary1table.gif

    Click on the GLOSSARIES sub-link to bring up a table listing any currently available glossaries.
    From this table, you can create a glossary, delete a glossary, or modify its status from viewable to archived.
    Because they have object ID numbers glossaries can be linked from any screen or added to packets.

    To create a new glossary, click on the Create a new Glossary link that appears above the glossary listings.

    glossary1nameit.gifEnter a name for the glossary and make sure that the status is set to Viewable if you wish students to have access to it immediately.


    After submitting, you will be back at the table of glossaries. Choose the Title of the glossary to which you wish to add terms.

    Click on the Add term link.glossary2addterm1.gif


    glossary2addterm2.gif

    Add the term at the top. Terms may be single words or phrases.
    Add the definition in the space provided.

    You may add images to any definition by embedding either an object ID tag or a common folder HTML tag. (Note that images embedded into the term field will cause problems in hangman.)
    Click [Add Entry]


    glossary3tentermsgames.gifEach time you add a term, your glossary will grow onscreen. After you have added ten or more terms, two vocabulary games will automatically be activated: hangman and a matching game.




    Uploading a Glossary File



    Prepare a text file of words and definitions in a plain text editor following this format:

    term - definition
    term - definition
    term - definition
    term - definition


    Note that there is a hyphen between the term and the definition. AND there must be a carriage or hard return between each entry so Educator knows the end of one term/definition pair and the beginning of the next.
    Save this file as a text document (use the .txt file extension).
    Note: Because of the way the system reads data from uploaded glossary files, hyphenated terms cannot be uploaded without error. The solution? Upload all other terms except the hyphenated ones, and manually add those in Educator (see above, Create a Glossary Using Educator Wizard) OR add the terms as multiple-word terms and just add the hyphens later.
    I.e. upload Face to face
    and later add the hyphens: Face-to-face.


    Once you have a saved file:
  • Click on the Course Materials main link in the course navigator bar.
  • select create a new glossary .
  • Click on the option to upload a glossary .
  • [BROWSE] for the text file you just saved, double-clicking on it to load it into the browse window
  • Click on Upload File!



    Linking Lecture Terms to the Glossary


    You can create a link for glossary terms that appear in your lecture so that the student can click on it to view the definition in a popup box. To do this, you need:
    1. The object ID number of the glossary
    2. The correct tag format

    The easiest way to quickly embed links in your lecture is to go to the glossary and click on one of the words you wish to link. In the example above, the word packet was a glossary term we created.
    Go back to view the term. You'll see the following notation at the bottom of the window:
    Use Object ID syntax:< object:603:term:packet > to embed hyperlink to term.

    All you need to do is copy that object ID tag and paste it over the term 'packet' wherever it occurs in your lecture or document. When the student views the document, that term will be a hot link: <object:603:term:packet>

    Of course, downloadable word processing documents cannot have interactive links such as these appear by using these methods.

    Usage Tips
    tip.gifThe quickest way to embed many terms from the same glossary is to copy the front part of the tag up to the term, like this:
    < object:603:


    Then, go to your lecture, and every time you come across a term from the same glossary, paste this part of the tag to the front of the term. Then add the closing bracket after the term: >. Be sure to use lower-case letters.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com






    3.19.1) Uploading Glossaries

    You may upload a glossary from a text file created offline. This tool can help improve efficiencies when entering large numbers of glossaries and terms into the course. Glossary files that are created offline must be saved in TEXT-ONLY format, must not contain line breaks within definitions, and must contain the correct formatting as described below.

    The upload can take place from within the glossary link as described here. Or you can use the Upload Center special object upload, making sure to select Glossary as the file format.



    Step one is to prepare the file:

    Prepare a text file of words and definitions in a plain text editor following this format:

    term - definition
    term - definition
    term - definition
    term - definition


    Note that there is a hyphen between the term and the definition. AND there must be a carriage or hard return between each entry so Educator knows the end of one term/definition pair and the beginning of the next.
    Save this file as a text document (use the .txt file extension).
    Note: Because of the way the system reads data from uploaded glossary files, hyphenated terms cannot be uploaded without error. The solution? Upload all other terms except the hyphenated ones, and manually add those in Educator (see above, Create a Glossary Using Educator Wizard) OR add the terms as multiple-word terms and just add the hyphens later.
    I.e. upload Face to face
    and later add the hyphens: Face-to-face.



    Step two is to upload the saved file:

  • Click on the Course Materials main link in the course navigator bar.
  • Click on the Glossaries sublink.
  • select create a new glossary .
  • Click on the option to upload a glossary .
  • [BROWSE] for the text file you just saved, double-clicking on it to load it into the browse window
  • Click on Upload File!

    Usage Tips


    caution.gifBe careful when using a word-processor such as Microsoft Word when uploading text files. Hyphens are not the same as hyphens in normal text files. If you have a problem with your upload, and you find you are using a word-processor, make sure you Save as... plain text. If that still doesn't work, copy and paste your work into a simple text editor such as Windows Notepad (in accessories) or TextEdit for the Mac.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    3.19.2) Matching Game

    Whenever a course developer creates a glossary containing 10 or more terms, Educator automatically creates a Matching Game from those terms.

    The Learner is provided with no more than 10 terms pulled at random from the entire glossary by the Educator Course Management System. The goal of the Learner is to match the terms provided on the left with the definitions displayed on the right.

    The Learner then submits their responses and the game is scored, showing any incorrect items and providing the correct response. The game is scored (not for credit) and a link to play again is displayed.

    Below are examples of the glossary terms matching game in action. Note in the second example that images can be used instead of text to create identification games.

    matchinggame1.gif



    glossarymatchinggamewimages.gif




    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com



    3.19.3) Hangman

    Educator automatically includes a link to a Hangman Game whenever a Knowledge Provider develops a glossary containing 10 or more terms.

    The Learner clicks on the Hangman Link and the Educator Course Management System selects a random term from the glossary. The following Hangman layout is displayed:

    hangman1.gif

    In the above example, the Learner has already guessed several letters that do not appear in the term we are looking for. The "Clue" is actually the set of letters that the Learner has guessed which are included in the term.

    We think we know this one.....

    hangman2.gif

    Got it!



    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    3.20) Equation Editor


    Equation Editor A tool that facilitates the publication of mathematical symbols to the web. Includes greek symbols. Does not include calculus symbols.


    QuickStart Directions

    toolbox.gif
    • Click on the Toolbox icon in the Educator toolbar located at the bottom of most Educator pages.
    • Choose the Equation Editor from the application display.
    • Click on any character in the character table. It will appear below the table.
    • Continue to build your equation by clicking on additional characters
    • When you are finished, click on the [Submit] button to transfer the equation to the textbox in the other popup window where it will appear as HTML code.
    • Highlight, copy and paste the code into your document

      OR
    • Click on the [Build HTML Object] button to create a stand alone document with its own object ID number
    • Highlight and copy the Object ID tag that is generated and paste it wherever you want a link to this object.

    Details


    The Educator Equation Editor is a simple mathematical equation building utility that allows you to build HTML code for displaying mathematical symbols which don't translate easily to web documents. When you first open the Editor, which is in the Educator Toolbox, you'll see two window popup displays. One carries the mathematical symbols that are available. The other is where the HTML is generated after you've built your equation.

    equationeditor1pair.gif


    Let's look at each one carefully.

    On the left is a character table displays greek symbols and arithmetic operators. Build an equation by clicking on each symbol that you need.
    It will appear in the empty space at the bottom of the window.

    equationeditor2characters2.gif

    Note that there are words that describe the character, such as "space" and dividing line. There is also text that may describe a function, such as subscript or superscript. For example, to build this equation:

    2|s| > |S|


    you would click on the number 2

    equationeditorscriptprompt.gif

    then click the word sup to bring up an input box where you'll type what is to be superscripted: |s|

    Press OK to place that output into your equation
    then click the word space
    then click the greater than symbol >
    then click on the pipe |, a capital S and finally the pipe |

    Once you have completed the entire equation, click on [Submit]
    (we're still in the Character Selection Window as shown above) to transfer the HTML code into the textbox in the other popup window.



    Now let's turn our attention to the other popup window, where the HTML equation is built. This is a good opportunity to edit the contents of the equation before using it in your course document.

    equationeditor3loadbox.gif

    At this point, you can do one of two things.
    If you wish to use the equation as part of a larger document, you can highlight, copy and paste the code directly.

    If you wish the equation to stand alone as an Educator Object, then you can click on the [Build HTML Object] button.

    equationeditor4buildobject.gif

    An almost identical screen will appear, but now you can label the object.

    equationeditor5savedobject.gif

    Clicking on [Submit] will generate an Object ID tag which you can then embed wherever you wish. The original code will be preserved in a Course Folder that Educator will create called Equations You can edit the original file if necessary.

    Tips
    tip.gifThe easiest way to get the hang of the equation editor is to practice using it. Use caution when selecting characters because you cannot delete a single character. You can only start over. So prepare the equation in advance and then carefully select all of the necessary characters.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com



    3.21) External Resources



    External Resources are support materials located outside of the virtual classroom environment. They may be independent websites or externally stored documents.


    Course instructors can link to a nearly infinite number of resources via the Web to enhance the delivery of information. Because these resources are located outside of the Educator Course Management System, special features were developed that allow you to 'fold' external web resources seamlessly into your course. This is done by creating topical folders into which web site addresses are stored as if they were annotated documents themselves. Students who click on these URLs will view the site from within the packet or folder, so that they don't necessarily have to leave the virtual classroom setting.

    If you wish to communicate with your students while viewing external resources please review the Help Center topic on the Interactive Web Tour.

    First, however, you must learn how to create Site Folders which is the topic of the next section.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    3.21.1) Site Folders

    Site Folders: Categorized folders of URLs assembled by the instructor to support and enhance the course. Site folders are located as a sublink under the External Links main navigation link.


    Knowledge Providers can use theSite Folder feature to form groups of subject specific links to external web content. The Site Folder becomes a type of learning object that contains a unit or "chunk" of related content.

    QuickStart Directions

    Click on the External Links main navigation link

    To create a folder

  • click on the Add Site Folder sublink
  • Name the folder
  • [Submit]


  • To add a link to an existing folder

  • click on the folder title
  • click on Add Site
  • fill in the complete URL and name of the site in the form that displays.
  • click [Submit]


  • To make folders active (visible to students) or inactive (invisible)
  • click on Site folder Status Control located under the display table of folders.

    To view student bookmarks (see the next topic)

  • Click on the External Links main navigation link
  • Click on the Student Bookmarks sublink.
  • Click on the Student's name
  • View or Remove bookmarks
    Note: Students can not hide bookmarks from instructors)


  • Details

    The External links feature gives you an opportunity to organize websites that support your course in a central location.

    Once a link is clicked, it opens in a frame which displays the link information at the top of the screen, and retains the course navigation column at left. Clicking on the Full Screen View removes the frames and displays the external site in a full window.

    externallinksamplelink.gif


    Usage Tips
    tip.gifSites disappear or move all the time. To make sure that your external links are still valid, be sure to click through them each time you teach your course.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    3.21.2) Interactive WebTour


    Interactive WebTour
    flashicon.gifA Flash 7 utility that will allow you to display Web Sites or course files on their own and their students' screens during a given session.


    Introduction

    The Educator Interactive Web Tour is a Flash collaboration feature that allows you to select course files, external links or any URL and cause them to open in a new window on the student's screen. Similar to a chat environment, this is a synchronous tool requiring you and the student(s) to access at the same time. Unlike a chatroom, however, although you can type comments to the student about the site or document you are pushing to them, their focus will be on the newly opened screen, thus the communication is one way.

    There are a few things you must know before using this feature:

    1. You must have Macromedia Flash 7 Player installed on your computer. This is available free of charge at http://www.macromedia.com/downloads/.

    2. You must have popup killers disabled. Each page launches from the previous popup, so it's best to permanently allow popups from this site. If you only temporarily disable the popup killer, each new window will have to be set to allow popups again. (You should get a dialog box that asks you if you wish to always allow popups from this site...simply reply yes and your other blocking won't be affected)

    3. Be careful when clicking on files while connected with students. There is no such thing as an unlocked folder or file once you click on it. It is displayed on the student's screen regardless of status.

    Details

  • Click on the [External Links] main navigation link (and instruct your students to do the same).
  • Everyone then needs to click on the Interactive Web Tour link located towards the top of the desktop.
    A popup will appear listing the participants and an audio function on the left. On the right side of the popup, the instructor will see navigation functions, while the student will see a simple dialog window where any comments you send will appear.

  • Instructor View
    webtour01.gif
    Student View
    webtourstudentview01.gif


    The navigation functions in the instructor view allow you to call up external links and course files from any of your courses, or any other URL even if it isn't saved as an external link in a course. In addition, you may type comments in the chat screen located under the function buttons. When you bring any of these things up on your screen, you will also bring it up to the students' screen.

    [My Websites]

    If you click on the [MyWebsites] button, a listing of all of your unarchived courses (designated by an Educator icon) will appear in a directory format. Click on any plus sign next to an icon to reveal site folders containing external links. Again, click on any plus sign next to a folder to reach the external links contained inside.

    webtour02externallinks1.gif

    The globe icon indicates a web site that you have saved as an external link. If you click on the web site icon and/or name, a separate window displaying this site will launch for you and any student that has also entered the Web Tour at the same time.
    Here is a look at what the student sees: the WebTour Flash window along with the external link that opens in a separate window.

    webtourstudentviewURLwindow.gif


    [MyFiles]

    You can also display course files on your students' screens by clicking on the [MyFiles] button.

    webtour03myfiles1.gif

    This works the same way as the external links, except this time clicking on a course name in the middle column will bring up the course folders and files in the right column. Open the folders by clicking on the plus sign. Then bring up a document on your collective screens by clicking on the object within the folder.
    Again, you will see file names with icons identifying the file type:

    iconword.gif - Word Document
    iconadobe.gif - PDF file
    iconeducator.gif - Educator Course
    iconhtml.gif - HTML document
    icontext.gif - TXT file

    Clicking on any file name will open that file in a new window on your students' screens as well as your own.



    [Manual URL]

    If you would like to push a specific URL onto your students' desktops and you don't have it saved as an external link, you can simply click the [ManualURL] button. This will open a dialog box where you can manually type in the Web site address for the site you wish your students to view.

    webtour04URL.gif




    Activating Audio Narration


    To use the Audio feature, you and your students need to have a microphone and speakers activated. Place a checkmark by clicking on the [ ]Auto checkbox in front of the [Talk] button. Educator will ask permission to access student's camera and microphone. Note that although the stock dialog box mentions cameras, it is not currently possible to use a camera in this feature--only microphones.

    webtour05talk01.gif

    Simply direct your students to answer 'Allow'. At this point anyone who has a microphone and speakers will be able to participate by actually speaking.

    Usage Tips

    tip.gifIf for some reason you no longer see yourself or your students in the list of participants, close your browser. Then launch your browser again and before accessing the Web Tour, clear the cache.
    (Explorer users: Tools Menu > Internet Options > Delete temporary files.
    Netscape Users: Edit Menu > Preferences > Advanced > Cache > Clear Cache)


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    3.21.3) Student Bookmarks



    Student Bookmarks: Collection of Internet site addresses that the student has collected.


    Students can collect their own course-supporting bookmarks on their own, or as a course assignment. (An external assignment would have to be created to track the grade)

    Clicking on the Student Bookmarks sublink under the External Links main navigation link brings up a listing student names, along with the number of sites they have collected. You also have a control here to allow students to view each others bookmarks.
    Students have their own control to make any individual bookmark active (visible) or inactive (invisible). But you must first check the control box here on your side to allow students to view bookmarks before their controls take effect. Students cannot hide bookmarks from you, the instructor.




    Click on the Student's name to access the bookmark collection. Note that you have the ability to remove inappropriate bookmarks.

    Usage Tips


    tip.gifSites disappear or move all the time. To make sure that your external links are still valid, be sure to click through them each time you teach your course.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    3.21.4) API Links


    API Builder API stands for Application Program Interface, a utility that builds a link from an external website to a specific place within your online course.


    QuickStart Directions

    QuickStart directions are included for those who have the Web development skills to understand the process. The complete lesson is included in Educator 102: Advanced Techniques for Teaching Online

    • Click on the Toolbox icon in the Educator toolbar located at the bottom of most Educator pages.
    • Choose the API Link Builder from the application display.

      apilink1.gif
    • In the next form type in the Object ID number of the course document that you would like to link to from your external web site.
    • Type in the custom text upon which you want your students to click.
    • Choose the display type (target)
    • If popup is chosen as the target, specify how wide and high the popup window should be.
    • Click on [Generate Code]

      apilink2.gif

      The next screen will display code that Educator has generated in order to create the link.
    • Highlight the code by dragging your mouse over it and left-clicking the mouse button.
    • Copy the code by right-clicking the mouse while it is still on the highlighted code.
    • Choose Copy from the mouse menu that appears.
    • Now go to your own web page code and place your cursor where you wish the link to occur.
    • Paste the code that's in your computer memory by right-clicking the mouse and choosing the paste function from the mouse menu that appears.
    • Publish your web page in your usual manner.

    Test out the link. When you click on it, if you are logged into your course, you should be taken to the document with the Object ID number that you used to generate the API link.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    3.21.5) Building Links


    External Links: Links from a course web page to another site outside of the course.


    Like internal documents, external web sites may be linked into any area of your course. There are two different ways to do this, one using the object syntax, and one using HTML code.

    The object syntax is based upon the object ID tag. Simply replace the object number with a complete web address (including http://).
    externallinkobjectsyntax.gif

    Note the two colons between the URL and the custom text. If you put nothing between the two colons, the default action is to create a link. However, if you want this external link to come up in a popup window, type
    <object:http://www.google.com:popup:Link to Google>

    putting in the display option of 'popup' between the two colons.

    Because you often want to specify the size of a popup, here is an example. The syntax for this is the same as in the object ID tag, leaving three colons between the custom text and the width and height specifications:
    <object:http://www.google.com:popup:Google:::600:500>



    If you are already familiar with HTML coding, to create the same link as above,use the following HTML syntax:
    externallinkHTMLsyntax.gif
    This would look like this to the user: Link to Google

    The advantage to using HTML syntax is that you may specify attributes such as the target, window style, etc.



    For more information on linking internal pages, see the Help Center section: Adding/Uploading Resources --> Object ID Numbers

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    3.21.6) Search Tools

    A sophisticated web and course search engine exists at the Educator Explorer.

    When you click on the Educator Explorer icon explorericon.gif, the righthand portion of the ensuing window has a web and course search engine that lets you:

  • Search the course for specific learning objects based on file name or Object ID

  • Search the course for specific learning objects that contain key words or phrases

  • Search the web using popular commercial search engines. Request links to web search engines through your local Educator administrator.

    websearch.gif

    In addition to using the Educator Explorer, you can also use the standard Educator Web Search Tool.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    3.22) Scheduling Resource Delivery

    Actions: Any scheduled change in status of a course activity or reminder of an activity. Actions can be scheduled in advance to operate automatically. /td>

    QuickStart Directions

  • Click on any controlled activity object (exam, discussion group, packet, etc)
  • Click on the Schedule Action link in the control panel

    actionsschedulewithalerts.gif

  • Indicate the date that you wish to have this activity take place
  • Choose the action (make active, make inactive, lock, unlock)
  • Check any optional activities that you would like to occur when this action takes place: i.e. force students into the object, send email alerts)
  • If you have optioned to send email alerts to yourself or your students, type in the email text.
  • Click [Submit]


    Details

    Scheduling Actions from the Actions Sublink

    Any packet and its contents can be scheduled to activate or inactivate automatically at a specified date and time. Besides the Schedule Action option in the object control panel of a controlled object explained in the QuickStart Directions, there is also an Actions sublink under the Course Information main link. To use this, you must first know the object ID number of the item you wish to schedule.

    By controlled object I mean any object that has an option to activate, deactivate, lock or unlock. General documents can't be scheduled for viewing. But if you put them in a packet, the packet itself can be scheduled to lock or unlock, giving you control over all course materials.

    actionscheduletable.gif

    After scheduling an object and clicking on [Submit], a table of scheduled actions will show you what you have set. To change or remove an action, click on the action link: for example, in this example, you would click on Locked to change or remove the scheduling for that object.


    Scheduling Independent Email Reminders

    Email reminders don't have to be associated with a particular scheduled action. You can schedule an email reminder to yourself or anyone else in the class about anything. To do this:
  • Click on the Course Information main navigator link
  • Click on the Actions sublink
  • Click on Schedule an Action

    actionscheduleemail.gif

  • Set the time and date and change the Object Control selection to Email Reminder
  • Click on [Submit]
  • Type in the email address if the message is not to go to yourself.
  • Type in the message
  • [Submit]

    Your email message will be delivered at the time and date you specified.

    Usage Tips

    tip.gifIf you are sending an email alert to your students, and you are using the View As Student feature in your course, you need not check the option to send yourself an email, as you will get one due to your student status in the course.




    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    3.23) Activating Objects



    Activating Objects: Ways of making course evaluation objects active and visible to students.


    QuickStart Directions

    Note: there are several ways to activate evaluation objects. The quickstart area demonstrates the most direct. However, depending upon your method of distributing course materials, you may choose one of the methods covered in the details.

  • Click on the evaluation object main navigation link (Exams, Quizzes, etc)
  • Click on the Modify link next to the specific object you wish to activate.
  • Scroll down to the Status dropdown menu and choose [ Active ]
  • Submit in order to save the new status.

    Details


    There are several ways to activate course materials, depending upon the circumstances and the way you distribute those materials:
  • Single activation
  • Via global status control
  • Via action scheduling

    In addition, there are special circumstances where materials can be activated for select students.

    Activation of a Single Learning Object

    Activating a single learning object so that the entire class can view it is probably the most common method of activation. To do that, you simply
  • Click on the evaluation object main navigation link (Exams, Quizzes, etc)
  • Click on the Modify link next to the specific object you wish to activate.
  • Scroll down to the Status dropdown menu and choose [ Active ]
  • Submit in order to save the new status.

    If you use Packets this procedure becomes even easier since you simply have to click through the packet contents and select the [ Active ] status for each object without having to go to each navigation main link first.


    Via global status control

    At the bottom of every table listing learning objects, there is a link to the status control of each one. For example, at the bottom of the Exams table, there is an Exam Status Control link.

    This leads to yet another table where you can change the active/inactive status of each individual object instead of modifying each one separately.

    activatingstatuscontrol.gif

    If you wish to change all the listed objects to the same status, use one of the radio buttons at the top of the table and then [Submit].



    Via action scheduling

  • Click on any controlled activity object (exam, discussion group, packet, etc)
  • Click on the Schedule Action link in the control panel

    actionsschedulewithalerts.gif

  • Indicate the date that you wish to have this activity take place
  • Choose the action (make active, make inactive, lock, unlock)
  • Check any optional activities that you would like to occur when this action takes place: i.e. force students into the object, send email alerts)
  • If you have optioned to send email alerts to yourself or your students, type in the email text.
  • Click [Submit]



    Special Circumstances


    Activating an Exam for a Single Student

    Sometimes it's necessary to give a student a makeup quiz or exam that you don't want other students to take or even see. To do this,
  • create the quiz or exam and make sure the status is set to [Inactive].
  • At the table listing all quizzes/exams, you'll see that the Inactive status is a link.
  • Click on the link to bring up your course roster.
  • Place a checkmark in front of each student to whom you wish to allow access.
  • Click [Submit]

    Student's that you have activated will be the only ones to see a listing for that particular exam or quiz.
    Remember that the gradebuilder counts the point value of the original exam. If you want the score for this assessment to count, you must transfer the student's earned grade over to the original assessment form.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    3.24) Forcing


    Forcing:
    Control over what is displayed first upon logging in to a course.

    QuickStart Directions

    1. Note the Object ID number of the item that you wish to appear upon login to the course.
    2. Click on the Course Manager main navigation link
    3. Click on the Forcing sublink
    4. Type in the object ID number or a CGI resource in the space provided
    5. Click on [SUBMIT]

    Details


    You can control what a learner initially sees in a course immediately upon login by using the forcing feature. You can force users to a page by specifying the object ID number or CGI resource name. (A CGI Resource refresher is located at the end of this tutorial page) The forcing feature is a sublink under the Course Manager main navigation link.

    To use the forcing feature:

    • Click on the Course Manager main navigation link (Sometimes renamed Course List, My Courses, etc)
    • Click on the Forcing sublink


    forcing1.gif

    You can either force yourself or your learners, as a group or individually, into the resource you specify.
  • Type in either an object ID number or a CGI resource in the space provided.
  • Click on [SUBMIT]

    If you wish to force individual learners into a page, click on the link labeled "Set Individual Forcing Conditions." A list of all learner names will appear. Fill in the Object ID or CGI resource name in the space next to the learner's name. Upon submission, the setting will appear.

    forcing2.gif

    To remove the condition, simply remove it from the textbox and resubmit.


    Refresher: What is a CGI Resource in Educator?

    Remember that every 'click' in Educator brings you to a unique URL. If you examine this URL, you will see a segment with a .cgi extension. This segment can be fashioned into an Object ID command that functions just like an Object ID number--linking to a specific learning object.

    cgi1.gif

    In the above example, the CGI Resource is mailbox.cgi which points to the gateway of Educator's E-mail system. You must remember to remove the .cgi extension when creating a Resource tag. Other common CGI Resources are
    assignments, coursematerials, chatroom, discussionboard, exams, gradereport, guestwebsites, quizzes, surveys, syllabus, practicetests, profile, worksheets, assignments, sitefolders, packets, glossaries, tasksheets


    Usage Tips

    tip.gif Once you've set forcing conditions, they are in effect until you remove them. So if your class is forced into a test, they will be forced into the test results once they have actually taken the test. One way to get around this is to have a link to the next packet or to the announcement page on your test results page, so students can get out of the page--especially if you have set 'no escape' conditions.

    tip.gifYou can also force yourself into a part of the course. Instead of landing at the announcements page each time you log in, why not force yourself into the Mailbox?!


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com






    4) Communicating



    Communication: In this context communication refers to electronic dialog between instructor and student or student and student in order to facilitate learning.


    Establishing communication between Learners, Knowledge Providers and Administrators is critical within an effective online learning and teaching environment. This section covers various techniques that can be used to that end such as:
  • instant messaging
  • integrated grading/email function
  • discussion groups viewable three ways
  • graded discussions
  • moderated chatrooms
  • whiteboard
  • Communicating can also be one of the most labor-intensive parts of an online environment. Educator helps you reduce that labor in the following ways:
  • Announcements that can be scheduled in advance
  • Announcements that are automatically emailed to students when posted
  • Tracking of grades with blind emails sent to students according to progress or grade
  • Automatic copying of discussion messages to other groups

  • Communication within Educator can be classified as Asynchronous or Synchronous. Depending on the outputs desired, Knowledge Providers can use either Asynchronous or Synchronous features found within Educator.

    Asynchronous communication occurs without the need for the Learner and Knowledge Provider to be using the program simultaneously. Educator's Discussion Board features are an example Asynchronous communication tools. For example, a Learner can post a question to the Discussion Board in the morning, then in the evening, a Knowledge Provider can answer that question.

    Synchonous communication occurs while the Learner and Instructor are signed into Educator simultaneously. An example is the Educator Instant Messaging tool that enables a Learner to invite a Knowledge Provider (or vice-versa) into a private, real-time chat scenario.

    In this section of the Online Instruction Manual, we will focus on Educator's many synchronous and asynchronous communication methodologies and will present scenarios highlighting how they can be put to work to enhance the quality of instruction delivered to your Learners.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com



    4.1) Announcements



    This function enables Knowledge Providers to deliver information to Learners that will be viewable immediately upon signing into the course.
    Location: Announcements is a Main Link in the Navigation Column.



    announcements1.gif

    QuickStart Directions


    Method One - Direct Edit

  • click on the ANNOUNCEMENTS link

  • highlight any current announcement text that you wish to delete.

  • Type your new announcement.

    announcements2.gif

    Under the announcement textbox area, you'll see formatting options. If you are using HTML for line spacing, then check the radio button in front of HTML. If you wish each line break to be visible as entered, even if you use HTML for text formatting, then check the TEXT radio button.

    announcements2a.gif

    You may then check the option to have the announcement mailed to each student in the course.


    If you wish to have Educator save an archived version of your announcements, you may first create a course folder with the folder name of 'announcements' (lower case 'a'). If you do that, then an option will appear each time you create an announcement to "Post to my announcement folder".




    Method Two - Upload

  • click on the UPLOAD ANNOUNCEMENT link at the bottom of the form.

  • browse for a previously prepared HTML or text file

  • click [UPLOAD!]

    announcements3.gif

    Note: Uploaded announcements are saved in the COURSE MATERIALS area in a folder named 'Announcements'. The date and timestamp is the filename. The actual announcement then becomes an Object ID link to this uploaded resource in this newly created folder.

    tip.gifTips!

  • Embed links and images into your announcement using HTML or object tags.

  • If you want images to carry over from semester to semester, store them in a COMMON FOLDER and paste the Educator-generated HTML link into your announcement.

  • Create announcements in either HTML or plain text.

  • Have Educator send your announcement as an email message to the entire class. Just check the checkbox on the announcement form. (Your course must have students enrolled in it for this feature to appear. Practice courses won't show this feature.)

  • If you schedule your materials to activate automatically, you can write a text message that will become your announcement automatically at the time the materials are activated.



    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    4.2) Educator's E-Mail System


    Educator E-mail: a fully functional email package that also tracks student-instructor correspondence and integrates with course functions such as exams, assignments, automated notification settings and student tracking.
    Your e-mail address in Educator is $username@educator.ucompass.com.


    QuickStart Directions

    To read mail:

    • Click on the Mailbox main navigator link
    • Click on the message subject to view the message
    • Click on the [Reply] button to reply to the open message
      Alternatively, to view the next unread message in your mailbox, click on Next Message (or Previous Message .

    To send a new message:

    • Click on the Send Message sublink under the Mailbox navigator link. --If the message is going to the entire class, you may check the checkbox in front of the appropriate class(es)
      --If the message is going to specific students in your class, click E-mail specific students from this (or all) course(s)
      --If the message is going outside the classroom, then type the recipients email address in the TO box.
    • Scroll down and type your message
    • Click [Send Mail]

    Moving or Deleting Multiple Messages

    • Click on the MANAGE MULTIPLE MESSAGES link.
    • Hold down the [Ctrl] key while clicking on individual messages to highlight multiple messages.
    • Click [delete], move to other folder, or forward by selecting the appropriate button at the bottom of the page.


    Details


    All Educator users receive a web-based e-mail address as soon as the Learner or Knowledge Provider account is formed for them. Your institution will decide whether this account will be restricted to your institution or be fully web-based.

    A web-based e-mail system is one that enables you to send and receive internet e-mail through your browser. There are many advantages to this - one of the greatest being that you can access your e-mail from any computer connected to the Internet unlike a traditional POP mail account that would require you to adjust settings on each different computer you used.

    To access your online course mailbox, click MAILBOX in the navigator column. You will also notice email links integrated into many different areas of the course, such as your syllabus access page, student profiles, and the discussion board messages.

    New Messages


    mail1inbox.gif

    Click the Mailbox link in the navigation bar and you will be directed to the Inbox. This area contains a list of e-mail messages you have received. They are presented in a table format, listing whether they've been read, who sent the message, the subject of the message, and a link to remove the message from your mailbox.

    The senderís name is a link to their profile information. When you click the senderís name, a pop-up window appears and lists the information they have chosen to share within the virtual classroom.

    The subject is also a link. When you click the subject of the e-mail, you are directed to the content of the senderís message. At the bottom of the screen are links to reply to the message, forward the message to another person, remove the message from your Mailbox, or to keep the message new.

    Send Message


    mail4sendmail.gifTo compose an e-mail message:

  • Click the Send Message link in the navigation bar. This takes you to a form where you either
    --check off the class to which you wish to send the message
    or --click on the link to bring up a list of specific course members with corresponding checkboxes
    or --enter the individual e-mail address for the person to whom you are sending the message
    Note: If you check the entire class, there is no need to add individual members of the class in the TO: field.

  • Click on the Attach File icon to access the contents of your computer drive. Double-click the file name to place it in the attachment textbox.

  • If you teach more than one course, you may want to change the course origination box to correspond to the student(s) to whom you are sending the message.

  • What does BCC to supervisors/guardians mean? This is used by K-12 institutions to monitor mail going to young children.

  • Type in the subject of the e-mail! This is extremely to the receiver--especially if it's something that may need to be referred to later!

  • add any copy-to addresses (CCs)

  • Type the content of your message in the text box labeled Message.

  • Spell-check if necessary.

  • When you finish typing your message, click Send Mail at the bottom of the screen.



    Keeping the System Quick and Efficient


    You need to clean out your mailbox periodically so that it doesn't slow down your course and collectively, the entire system. If you don't want to delete your messages because you need to keep them at least for a period of time after your course ends, sort the old ones into folders and then export the folders to your desktop. You'll be able to view each message just as if it were still in your mailbox. However, you'll not be able to reply or forward a message that's stored offline.
    To export a folder,

    1. Click on the Mail Folders sublink located under the Mailbox main navigation link.
    2. Click on the Export link next to the message total.
    3. A JavaScript popup will appear with the directions for the steps you need to take after you save the file.

      mailboxexport1popup.gif

    4. After you click OK, another dialog box will appear. (It may take a few minutes) Choose Save to Disk

      mailexport2savetodisk.gif

    5. You'll find the offline.cgi file on your desktop. This is where you need to follow the directions that appeared on the first JavaScript popup.
    6. Change the name of the file from offline.cgi to ____.zip Name it something that will tell you later what it is such as 2005mail.zip.
    7. Unzip ______.zip by double-clicking on the folder or by using an unzip utility (depending upon how old your operating system is.)
    8. Once it is unzipped, double-click on the index.html file and you will be able to view your messages offline.
      Note: Each time you export a folder, it will be called offline.cgi. Make sure you change the name of one before exporting another.

    Usage Tips!


    tip.gif Paste your email address anywhere! Although your email address is accessible in many areas of the course, there are times where you want to include it within a document you are writing. There is an object ID syntax that will allow you to link to a new message in the users mail box when that link is clicked. Just type:

    <object:sendmessage:popup:Custom Text:$username@educator.ucompass.com>

    object command -> cgi -> optional display command -> custom text -> email address
    The email address will be pre-filled into the Educator email new message form.

    The first time your email address appears in the object ID tag, it is directing Educator to the actual email address to use. The second time it appears, it represents the link that the user will click on. So it will appear to the user like this:
    $username@educator.ucompass.com


    tip.gif Moving mail to storage folders and even archiving them doesn't reduce the load in your mailbox. It only makes it easier for you to sort through your mail. Mailboxes with a lot of messages and folders will slow down your system. Delete messages or download them after each course ends.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    4.2.1) File Attachments


    E-Mail (Continued)
    Sending File Attachments in e-mail


    Educator is equipped to send email attachments (Up to 3 MB) as one method of file dissemination inside and outside of the e-learning environment. Since this is not the most efficient way of distributing files, causing multiple duplications that tax the system, please use this method sparingly. See the next section on System Etiquette for more information and suggestions.
  • Click on your Mailbox main navigation link.
  • Click on the Send Message sublink
  • Fill out the TO, SUBJECT and the MESSAGE fields.
  • Click on the Attach File link and icon at the top of the new message form.

    attachments1.gif

    Once the Attach File button is clicked you'll see a file attachment preference form:

    attachments2.gif

  • Specify the number of files you wish to attach. For example, in the above example, three files are specified. In the next screen, as shown below, three browse options are displayed.

    attachments3.gif



  • Attaching Files From Your Course

    For this option, you need to know the object ID numbers of the course files that you wish to attach. These files can only be opened within the Educator environment. If sent to the outside, the object ID number will be meaningless.

    Instead of specifying My Computer for the location of your files, specify Course Files in the File Location pulldown.

    Then insert the Object ID Numbers of the outgoing file attachments.



    Receiving File Attachments

    When a file attachment is attached to an e-mail in your Educator mailbox, you can conveniently import that resource into your knowledge storage area.

    Clicking on the File Attachment will yield a list of all your courses and all your Course Folders and Student Folders. All you need to do is click on the folder where the attachment should be stored.

    caution.gifUse caution when opening attachments. If you don't know the sender, don't open it! Even if you do know the sender, use the Virus Scan that Educator provides. Sometimes others don't even know that they are transmitting viruses in their mail.
    virusscan.gif



    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    4.2.2) System Etiquette


    Email (Continued)
    Netiquette



    Instructors and Learners using the Educator-provided e-mail program, should follow the System Etiquette rules below to ensure optimal functioning of the system:

  • Clean out your mailbox on a regular basis - this will help preserve system resources and disk space. See the Help Center section: Mail Folders for directions for downloading old email messages to your desktop for safe-keeping.

  • Whenever possible, please distribute files to learners using the Folder or Packet method of posting materials as opposed to e-mailing attachments individually - Consider a course of 100 learners who receive a Word Document from you delivered to them through the Course Folder. The Word Document occupies a total of 50 K of disk space within the Course Folder. Each Learner accesses the same resource that has been included in one location. Now consider the alternate method of e-mailing the same Word Document resource to each Learner within the class. E-mailing the content will occupy 50 K x 100 learners, or 5,000 K or 5 MB of disk space! The latter method can slow system resources available for all users and is discouraged.

  • Learners should be encouraged to submit their work by uploading resources into their Student Folder as opposed to e-mailing them. Even better is the use of the Assignments tool so that the uploaded material will be associated with the assignment and the grade issued properly. For more information regarding the assignments tool please refer to the External Assignments unit of the Help Center section called Evaluating Learners.

  • In all cases, the use of Educator's mail program for commercial purposes such as unsolicited commercial e-mail (spam) is prohibited. Anyone choosing to ignore this system rule will have their Educator acount terminated immediately.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    4.2.3) E-Mail Preferences


    Email (Continued)
    Setting Preferences



    E-Mail Preferences control such things as
  • Forwarding all e-mail sent to this account by entering the e-mail address to which you would like all e-mail sent.
  • Entering a signature that will be appended to all outgoing e-mail.
  • Changing the return address that will be displayed to the recipients of your e-mail messages.
  • Setting the capability for students to send/not send messages to the entire class.
  • Choosing to subscribe to the Educator updates mailing list.



    E-Mail Preferences is a sublink under the mailbox link. Knowledge providers can set forwarding and return-to options for incoming and outgoing e-mail messages. In other words, mail can be forwarded to an alternate e-mail address, and the Knowledge Provider can control if a copy of the forwarded mail is also contained within the course management system e-mail. In addition, all mail can be set to be returned to an address that is different than the one from which the mail was sent. See the options displayed below:

    mailpreferences.gif

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    4.2.4) Address Book



    E-Mail (Continued)
    The Address Book


    The Address Book sublink under the Mailbox main navigation link provides a course and personal Address Book function.

    The Knowledge Providers Address Book is automatically populated with learner information as soon as the Learner is enrolled into any of your courses. In addition, you can manually enter non-learners into your Address Book.

    mailaddressbooklookupandAdd.gif

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    4.2.5) Mail Lists



    E-Mail (Continued)
    Mail Lists


    The Mail Lists sublink under the Mailbox main navigation link allows Instructors to build contact lists that can easily be e-mailed with one click. The value provided in this tool relates to the ability to create lists of up to 100 recipients and to send e-mails to all list members with many less steps that sending mail individually.

    Below we summarize the process of building a mail list:

    1) Go to the Mail Lists sublink then find the NEW MAIL LIST link:

    2) Enter a name for your mail list

    3) Specify how many people should be on the new mail list

    maillists1.gif

    4) Enter the names and e-mail addresses of your mail list members

    maillists2.gif

    5) As soon as you form a mail list, it will appear when you go to Send an E-Mail

    maillists3.gif

    Uploading a Mail List

    You can go to the Special Object Upload Center and upload a mail list created offline.

    The file must be saved as a TEXT ONLY file and the format will be as follows:

    Name-EMail Address

    For example:

    Bob Barker-tpir@ucompass.com
    Frank N Stein-fstein@ucompass.com

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    4.2.5.1) Uploading Mail Lists



    E-Mail (Continued)
    Uploading Mail Lists



    Just as in most other Educator functions, instructors can create a mail list offline and then use the Upload Mail Lists function to upload it into the system.

    The file MUST be saved as TEXT ONLY. If you are using a word processor, please also specify "with NO LINE BREAKS". To create your Mail List, use the formatting guidelines shown in the example below, and save the document as a text file. (A text file automatically uses the .txt extension.)


    Sue Jones,sjones@ucompass.com
    Howie Nicholson,hnicholson@ucompass.com
    Bob Smith,bsmith@ucompass.com



    Now:
    1. Go to the Mail Lists sublink located under the mailbox main navigation link.

    2. Click the link New Mail List
      This link is found in the center screen, to the right of the Navigation Panel (when the panel is located in the default position).

    3. Next, use the CLICK HERE to upload a mail list link.

    4. Browse to find your saved mailing list file on your desktop and make sure the drop-down menu has Mail List selected (this should automatically default for you).

    5. Finally, click on the [Upload File!] button.



    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    4.2.6) Mail Folders

    E-Mail (Continued)
    Mail Folders


    QuickStart Directions
    • Click on the [Mailbox] main navigation link
    • Click on the Mail Folders sublink
    • To create a new mail folder, click on the New mail folder link.
    • To archive (hide) a folder, check the checkbox in front of it and [Submit]
    • To view the contents of a folder, click on it's name
    • To export the contents of a folder for offline viewing, click Export and follow the onscreen directions for creating a zip file on your desktop. Add a .zip extension to the file before you save it.
    • To remove a folder, enter it first, check the checkbox in front of
      []Check here to remove this folder and then
      [Submit]


    Details


    Knowledge Providers can form an unlimited number of mail folders within the Educator e-mail feature. Mail Folders are a convenient method of organizing and storing e-mail.

    To create a new folder in e-mail, click on the Subject of your mail to view the e-mail message. Next, click on the [Move to Mail Folder] button located at the bottom center of the screen (as shown in the example below).

    mailfolders.gif

    Once the [Move to Mail Folder] button is clicked, the following dialogue appears:

    mailfolders2.gif

    Notice that existing folders are displayed in the example above. The existing folders are

    Meteorology Papers
    Astronomy Papers

    Further down in the example above, locate the field to name your new Mail Folder and click the [Submit] button. You can view all your Mail Folders by going to the [Mailbox] main Link and clicking on the Mail Folders sublink from the navigation panel.

    To Remove or delete a mail folder, click on the folder itself. Then at the top of the page, check the checkbox in front of
    []Check here to remove this folder
    and click the [Submit] button.



    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    4.2.7) E-Mail Reminders



    E-mail Reminders: can be scheduled in advance to be sent automatically through your Educator course. This is found by clicking the Actions sublink under the Course Information main link.


    QuickStart Directions


  • Click the Course Information main navigation link.
  • Click the Actions sublink.
  • Click the link named SCHEDULE AN ACTION.
  • Fill in the scheduling information.
  • Select E-Mail Reminder from the drop down menu and submit.
  • Supply the email text and address to which you want the reminder sent.

    actions1.gif

    actions2.gif

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




  • 4.3) Groups

    Groups refer to the discussion area within Educator where students may be assembled into teams in order to carry on synchronous (chat) or asynchronous (discussion boards) conversations.
    Location: Discussion groups are located under the Discussions main navigator link.


    QuickStart Directions

    To create a discussion group:
    • Click on the Discussion Board main navigator link.

    • Click on the Add Group sublink

      groups1add.gif

    • Type in the group name

    • Type in the topic

    • Specify whether the group should include the entire class or selected class members.

    • Specify whether the group should be visible immediately (active) to group members, or whether it should currently be hidden (inactive).

    • Click on [Submit]

    At this time, you may post a message to the group.

  • Type in the message subject
  • Type in the message body

    - - If you would like the same message repeated to other groups, place a checkmark in front of the group names

    - - If you would like the ability to grade replies to this message, indicate the assignment that should track the grade. (If you haven't created an appropriate assignment, you may do so and come back later to make this association)
  • Click on [Submit] to post the message.
  • groups2post.gif

    Details


    Editing Discussion Messages

    To make changes to messages you have posted, you need to view the message.
  • Click on the Discussion Board main link
  • Click on the Groups sublink
  • Click on the message subject link
  • Click on the Modify/remove post link
  • Make your changes and then [Submit]

  • Editing Discussion GroupsIf you wish to activate, deactivate, or restrict group activities:
  • Click on the Discussion Board main link
  • Click on the Edit Groups sublink

    All group names will appear. From this page you may
  • Change the order that groups are listed by changing the layout number
  • Allow students to add groups (a function normally reserved for instructors)
  • Restrict student removal or modification of posts once posted
  • Remove students' ability to start new threads. (This means they will be able to reply or create a subthread only)Note: These settings apply to all groups. If you would like to edit just one group, click on the group name.
    The limits you can impose on individual groups are to
  • activate or inactivate the group
  • open a team discussion to the entire class
  • turn off the student's ability to post. (This would function like an instructor's bulletin board only)
  • moderate postings by requiring instructor approval before messages become visible to others
  • add or delete select members from the group



  • Controlling All GroupsYou can manage all Group participants using a snapshot view. To see this feature, click on the Discussion Board Main Link and scroll down to the bottom of the table located in the center screen. Locate the GROUP ASSIGNMENTS link.

    Click on the link to display the following:

    groups3.gif

    The first row displays the Activity Section Title. The title of the Activity can be any title desired by the Knowledge Provider. In the example above, the Knowledge Provider has created an open Forum that will allow contributions from all course members (there is a check by each Learners name). In addition,the Knowledge Provider has used Team 1, Team 2, Team 3 titles to delineate various activities of the Group members.

    To edit the settings for any one Activity Section, click on the Activity Section Title in the first row of the table. At the next screen, you will be provided with a settings dialogue giving options to add and remove Group members, change the Activity Section Title, change the topic related to the Activity Section Title, change the status (active-or viewable versus inactive-or not viewable), or deny all attempts to submit discussion board postings by Learners.

    Knowledge Providers can view a summary of individual student postings. Click on the Discussion Board Main Link and scroll down to the bottom of the table located in the center screen. Locate the following link

    CLICK HERE for a summary of Discussion activity

    Click on the link to display a list of students and their individual contributions to the Discussion Board. A table will appear. Click on the Name column for a comprehensive break down of the students postings and your responses.

    Tips
    tip.gif If students are added to a course after it has begun, and groups have already been formed, they will have to be added to the groups, even if the group consists of the entire class. A quick way to do this is to
  • Edit Groups

  • Find the radio button: Check here if group should be open to the entire course.

  • [Submit]



  • Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com



    4.3.1) Discussion Boards


    Discussion Board: A message board that is formed when a group is created. Initial messages can be posted by the instructor or students, which can then be replied to by others in the group. Discussion boards are found by clicking the Discussions main navigator link.

    QuickStart Directions

    • Click on the Discussions main navigation link.
    • Click on the Add Group sublink.
    • Supply a Group Name and Topic in the spaces provided.
    • Select the drop-down menu option that specifies whether you wish the group to be open to the whole class or to select members.
    • Make the group active (visible to students immediately) or inactive (invisible to students until you activate)
    • [Submit]
    • Click on the Begin Posting Messages link.
    • Create your first message by supplying the message subject
    • Enter the message itself.
    • If you have created other groups previously, and would like to repeat the same message, indicate those groups with a checkmark.
    • If you would like to grade the messages submitted as responses to this message as part of an assignment, indicate the assignment by selecting the appropriate radio button.
    • Click on [Submit]

    To grade a response, you click on the [Grade] link within each student's submission.

    Details

    Each group formed by the Knowledge Provider is equipped with a Discussion Board for asynchronous communication activities as well as a chatroom, a topic that will be discussed in the Chatrooms unit of the Help Center.

    There are three types of communication activities that take place within
    a Discussion Board:

  • Posts
  • Replies
  • Subthreads

    Posts

    A post is the initial branch or Initial Message of a Discussion Board event:

    discussionboard1.gif

    discussionboard2.gif

    Replies

    Once a post has been initiated, Knowledge Providers and Learners can come in and issue a Reply:

    discussionboard3.gif

    discussionboard4.gif

    Subthreads

    This is a reply to a reply.

    discussionboard5.gif

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    4.3.1.1) Linear Mode



    Linear Mode: On a discussion board, linear mode refers to the display of all messages that form a thread on a single page. This is the default viewing mode.


    Posts and replies are displayed in a continuous chain with subthreads branched off of replies:

    linear.gif

    The thing to watch for here is that students do not use the [NEW MESSAGE] link to post a reply. That will begin an entirely new thread and will not appear as a reply to this message.

    You can resolve this by either reminding students to use the [REPLY] link
    or
    disable the students' ability to post new threads by clicking on the Discussions [Edit Groups] subthread in the navigation column.

    discussiondontallowstudentsthreads.gif


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    4.3.1.2) Threaded Mode



    Threaded Mode: On a discussion board, linear mode refers to the split screen display of a thread with message headers and subheaders displayed in chronological order as submitted on the left side with the content of a selected message displayed on the right.


    In the Threaded Viewing Mode, all subthreads, replies and posts are viewable from one screen.

    threaded.gif


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com









    4.3.1.3) Roundtable Mode



    Roundtable Mode: On a discussion board, linear mode refers to the split screen display of a thread with message headers and subheaders displayed in alphabetical order on the left side with the content of a selected message displayed on the right.


    Roundtable viewing lets you see what each group member is doing (or not doing) from one screen. The UNREAD reference below means that the message has not been read by the user. To further explain, the Educator Course Management System keeps track of you as the user with your username and password and displays the word UNREAD next to any messages that have not been accessed by you. Learners see the same message to assist them in knowing what they have and have not accessed.

    roundtable.gif

    Tips

    caution.gifIf you display messages in linear mode at any time, those messages will all be considered 'read' since they're displayed on one screen. They will NOT be marked UNREAD if you go into threaded or roundtable mode once they've been displayed as linear, whether you've read them or not.



    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    4.3.1.4) Exporting to Text Files



    Exporting to Text Files: The act of saving group discussions in text files and downloading them to your local computer so that the messages can be viewed offline.



    Instructors can download all groups on the Discussion Board to a text document and view the information later without an internet connection.

    Click on the Discussion Board Main Link and scroll down to the bottom of the table located in the center screen. Locate the link that reads DOWNLOAD GROUPS.

    Knowledge Providers can Download Group Topics to a text document. Click on the Discussion Board Main Link. In the table located in the center screen, click on the links in the Group Name column and you will see more information (posts, replies and subthreads). Scroll to the bottom of this screen and you will see the following image (with active links):

    discussiontable.gif

    Click on the Download Group link to download a text document that summarizes this groups Topics for off-line viewing.

    Knowledge Providers can Download Group Posts to a text document. Click on the Discussion Board Main Link. In the table located in the center screen, click on the links in the Group Name column and you will see more information (posts, replies and subthreads). Click on the subject name of the Discussion Board posting you wish to view (indicating the viewing environment in the pull-down; linear, threaded, or roundtable). Scroll to the bottom of this screen and you will an image similar to the one above, with an active link called Download Post.

    Click on the Download Post link to download a text document that summarizes this groups posts for off-line viewing.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    4.3.1.5) Grading Discussions


    Discussion Boards (continued)
    Grading Discussion Messages


    QuickStart Directions


    Before you can grade a discussion message, you must first create an assignment in the Assignment area with which to associate the discussion. This is where Educator will track the points given for each message that pertains to that assignment.

  • Click on the Discussion main navigator link
  • Click on a group containing a thread that you wish to grade.
  • Click on the initial message that you have posted for this discussion assignment.
  • Scroll down to the Assignment Association option and click on the word None
  • Choose the assignment from the list that appears by clicking the radio button that appears in front of it.
  • [Submit]

    Details


    You can associate any discussion with an assignment so that the student replies can be graded and be recorded in the grade summary.
    Go into the instructor initial message in which you wish to grade student replies.
    dbassignmentassociation.gifScroll down to the Assignment Association option which is now set to have no association.

    Click on the word None which is a link.

    Select the assignment to which you wish to associate the message responses.
    [Submit]


    Once you have associated a message to an assignment, the student replies will have a GRADE option. (Only you can see this).

    Students will be able to view assigned grades in either of two places: in their graded responses, or in their Grade Summary under the assignment that was associated with the discussion in question. Students can only view their own grade in either location.

    Note: To change the assignment association, go back into your initial message and click modify/remove posting. Scroll down and click on the name of the assignment you currently have associated with this discussion. Then you'll see a listing of all of your assignments. Simply deselect the original assignment you indicated and select one of the others. Then click on [Submit].


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    4.3.1.6) Discussion Search



    Discussion Search: A sublink under Discussions that allows users to search for terms used in any or all discussions held in a course.


    QuickStart Directions

  • Click on the Discussions main navigation link.
  • Click on the Discussion search sublink.
  • Enter a search term.
  • Leave the default at All Groups or select an individual group to search.
  • Click on [Search]
  • Click on the group name to view the group, or the post title to view the messages.

    Details


    Instructors and students can find important concepts introduced into the discussion boards by performing a keyword search.
    The discussion search function is a sublink under the Discussions main navigation link.
    Searches can be executed on all groups or one single group.

    discussionsearch.gif

    Search results contain the name of the group containing pertinent keywords, as well as a listing of each significant post. Click on the group name to view the entire group and all of its threads. Click on the message title in the second column to view the thread containing the keyword.

    discussionsearchresults.gif


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com






    4.3.2) Group Object IDs



    All Educator discussion groups have been stamped with an Object ID number. This means that you can
    • link to the group directly from anywhere else in the course
    • schedule the group to become active or inactive at a specific time
    • reach discussion groups via the API function


    In the example below, <object:68> would link directly to the Week One Discussion Group.

    groupsID1.gif

    You may still reach the discussion board in general by using the CGI resource object command tag as follows:
    <object:discussionboard::Click here to go to the discussion boards>


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    4.3.3) Learner-Led Groups



    Learner-Led Group Discussions: Discussions initiated and facilitated by a student.


    Normally, in Educator Discussion Boards, the Knowledge Provider is the only one who can initiate discussions by creating groups. However, you can give this ability to learners as well. To do this, click on the Edit Groups sublink under the main link. At the bottom of the Activity Groups table, you'll see a checkbox you can activate to allow students to add groups.

    groupslearners1.gif


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    4.3.4) Learner File Sharing



    File Sharing: In this context file sharing refers to the most efficient way for students to share or transfer documents.


    Details


    Often, when students are given team assignments, they need to transfer files back and forth. Although the method that comes to mind first is probably using email to attach files, this is not the most efficient way to transfer files. This results in multiple copies of files being stored within the course environment, which eventually will result in a slow-down of the system.

    A better way for students to share files is right from their own folders. There are, in fact, several ways they can do this.

    • Marking a file for viewing by other students.

    • If you view a file that is stored in a student folder, you, and the student will see an option to give other students within the class permission to open and view the file. If the student belongs to a discussion board group, the entire group can be checked and each student belonging to that group will then see a link to that file from within the discussion board.

      The screen example below shows the information page for a student file named abigailsfile.txt. Note that individual students are listed at the bottom of the page, followed by groups. This example shows the file being made accessible to the group TEAM 1 ETHICS.

      filesharing.gif

      If you go onto the discussion board and click on the group TEAM 1: ETHICS, you'll see, in the control panel, a link called GROUP FILES. Students will also see that link in their much smaller control panel. Clicking on this link will show a list of files that have been made accessible to this group.groupscontrolpanel.gif



    • Sharing Files from within the Discussion Group

    • You don't have to start in the student folder. If a student is already in the discussion board group, files can be added to the group files simply by clicking on the GROUP FILES link as demonstrated above. The files that are in the student folder will be listed along with an option to Add file to the group files.


    • Sharing files through the Common Folders

    • Common folders aren't usually used for students, but they can be opened up to students. This is especially useful if an instructor has documents that need to be shared across many courses. The trick here is to make sure that the common folder is not contained within a locked or invisible folder. And be sure not to store any files in it that you don't want shared.

      First you need to create a new common folder.
      stretcher.gif
    • Click on the Course Materials main navigator link
    • Click on the Common Folders sublink.
    • Click on Create New Common Folder
    • Fill out the name and any comments as you would normally do.
    • Now scroll down to the section marked Course Access and check either
    • the top checkbox if you want this folder to be accessible from all of your active courses
    • or select individual courses.
    • commonfolderforstudents.gif

    • Click the [Submit] and highlight and copy the link that Educator generates.
    • Paste the link into your course
      OR
      You can simply tell your students to go into the Course Materials link themselves, and they will now see a sublink called Common Folders which will reveal this and any other accessible common folders you have created.

      This last method is great for storing documents used by many courses, but that you want to revise only once.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    4.3.5) Clearing Group Content

    Clearing Group Content: Removing all threads, replies and subthreads from selected discussion groups.


    QuickStart Directions



  • Click on the Discussions main navigation link.
  • Select a group.
  • Scroll down to the group control panel.
  • Click on the Clear groups link option.
  • groupscontrolpanel.gif

  • Click on the checkbox in front of all groups that you want to clean out.

    groupsclear.gif

  • Click [Submit]

    Your groups will remain intact, however, all messages will be erased, including your own.



    Usage Tips
    tip.gifDid you know...
    ...that when you copy a course over for reuse, the discussion boards are cleared out of student input, BUT your initial message is retained?


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    4.4) Chatrooms



    Chatroom: Course area allowing realtime dialog between course participants.



    Instructors have access to seven different types of synchronous Chatrooms in Educator. The real-time Chatroom types are:
    • General Course Chat
      This chatroom is open to the entire course membership and can be entered from the main navigation column. Participants can submit dialog at any time. Chatrooms
    • Moderated Chat
      This chatroom restricts postings to those accepted by the moderator, usually the instructor. The moderated chatroom is accessible from the General Chatroom.
    • Temporary Chat
      A temporary chatroom is formed by users in the general chatroom who wish to carry on a private conversation limited to select class members.
    • Group Chat
      A group chatroom is created every time a group is added to the discussion boards. Access is via the discussion board control panel.
    • Staff Chat
      The staff chatroom is limited to course instructors. Access is through the general chatroom.
    • Private One-to-One Chat
      Private instant messaging can be initiated by clicking on the Who's Online and inviting a listed online member to a private chat.

    In this section we will explore the different chat methods in Educator in detail.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    4.4.1) Chatroom Mechanics


    Chatroom(continued):
    Using the General Chatroom


    QuickStart Directions

  • Click on the Chatroom main navigation link.
  • Type a message in the box at the top of the screen.
  • Click the Post Message] button.
  • Your message will be posted in the running dialog taking place on the right half of the screen.
  • To leave the chatroom, click on the Return to course link under the input box.

    Details

    The Chatroom in Educator is broken up into three panels:
    1. The Chat Speaking Area is located in the top center panel which contains the text box and refresh options
    2. The Content Area that is displayed in the panel on the right side of the screen and contains the participant dialog containing text, images, links etc.
    3. Chatroom options are located in the bottom left side of the screen.

    chatroom.gif

    The two images below show a close up of the Chat Speaking Window (Panel) and the Content Window (Panel):

    Chat Speaking Area

    chatspeak.gif

    Content Area

    chatcontent.gif

    Usage Tips
    tip.gifAside from typical free-form class discussions, chatrooms can be used for other activities such as debates and simulations.

    tip.gifAny document having an object ID can be distributed within the chatroom by simply pasting the object ID tag. It will appear as a link in the message postings. If it is an image, it will display.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    4.4.2) Moderated Chatrooms



    Moderated chat: An asynchronous dialog similar to a classroom discussion in which the instructor calls on students when it is their turn to speak. Students may submit messages, but they are selected for display only by the instructor. The Moderated Chat feature is a link within the general chatroom controls.


    QuickStart Directions

    • Click on the Chatroom main navigation link
    • Click on the Moderated Chat link located in the chatroom controls area on the left side of the screen.
    • Post an initial message to begin the session.
    • As student's submit postings, click on the View link to read them.
    • Click on the Accept Question to post them for all students to read, or
    • Reject to delete them.

    Details


    In the example below, the instructor would click on View for the messages posted by the students Abigail and Ida. Then, if he wanted the students to view the messages, he would click on Accept Question. If he chooses not to display the student's posting, he can click the Reject link under Options which appears next to the student's name.


    chatmoderated.gif


    popupstudentprofile.gifClicking on a student's name will, as in most instances in Educator, bring up the student profile along with a link to his or her course records.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    4.4.3) Temporary Chatrooms



    Temporary Chatrooms : Chatrooms formed upon command by either students or instructors for hosting private conversations.


    Within the General Chatroom, Knowledge Providers and Learners can form a new Temporary Chatroom by clicking on the Form Chatroom link located in the lower left panel of the general chatroom.

    A new form will open giving instructors and/or learners the opportunity to invite all or specific members of the course into the Temporary Chatroom.

    chatroomtemporary.gif

    The Temporary Chatroom will automatically expire after 10 minutes of inactivity and will not provide a chat log of the postings as is provided within the General Chatrooms and Group Chatrooms.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    4.4.4) Group Chatrooms


    Group Chatroom: Specialized are where members of a specific group can hold a private team discussion. Access is through the discussion board group control panel Group Chat link.


    QuickStart Directions

  • Click on the Discussions main navigation link.
  • Click on the group with which you wish to chat.
  • Scroll down to the group control panel.
  • Click on the Group Chat link.

    Details

    When a Knowledge Provider forms a group, a Group in the discussions area, a private group chatroom and a threaded discussion board are automatically created.

    Access to the group chatroom is always through the group itself in the discussion area. Scroll down to the control panel and click on the GROUP CHAT link.

    groupscontrolpanel.gif
    Group Chatrooms are ONLY open to members of the associated group.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    4.4.5) Staff Chatrooms



    Staff Chatroom: Course area allowing realtime dialog among course instructors. Each instructor has an access point through his or her own course general chatroom.



    Instructors have access to a private area where they can chat realtime with other instructors who are online at the same time. Similar to the instant chat function where instructors can see each other online, the staff chatroom differs in that more than two people can participate in the discussion.

    The Staff Chatroom is open to Knowledge Provider users of http://educator.ucompass.com only.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com






    4.5) Who's Online Function

    Who's Online: A popup utility that scans and reports which students in your course(s) and which staff are currently online. It also facilitates instant messaging, alerts you to new email and gives the time of day according to the atomic clock. Who's Online is a main link in the navigation column.

    QuickStart Directions


  • Click on the Who's Online main navigator link.
    --To invite a user to a private chat
    .click on their name.
    .click on the Send Invitation to Chat link.


    --To view an online student's course records

    .Click on their name
    .Click on Course Records


    --To monitor who is online but not allow others to see that you're online

    .Click on the Make Yourself Invisible link toward the bottom of the window.


    --To close Who's Online, [X] out the browser window.

    Details


    whosonline1.gif When you click the Whoís Online link in the navigation bar, a new browser window similar to the one at left will pop up. Tables notify you which students and staff members are online.


    There is one element of this feature that sometimes confuses users. The table shows which students from each course are online. This doesn't mean that they are actually in that course now--they may actually physically be in another course.

    That's why sometimes, if you don't archive your course*, it looks like students are in a course offered during a past semester. But actually, the system is only notifying you that a student that took that course is currently online. To make sure a course doesn't show up in your "Who's Online" window, simply archive the course.

    Once you know who is online, you can begin an Instant Messaging Session with any of these users.
    Click the user name of the person with whom you would like to communicate. This launches another pop-up window that tells you the personís full name, e-mail address, time logged in, and the Network address from which they signed on.
    Click on SEND INVITATION TO CHAT. If the person is a student, you will also see a link to his or her course records.

    What if you get no response...?
    Occasionally, someone may appear online, but they don't respond to your invitation. There can be two reasons for this.
    One, they may have forgotten to log off, but they really aren't in the Educator system anymore. Or...
    Two, they are indeed online, but haven't actively communicated with the course since you issued the invitation. For example, they may be taking an exam, and won't get your invitation until they click the [submit] button. If you don't get a response after a few minutes you can click on the [cancel] button.

    Usage Tips
    >tip.gifDon't forget to close the Who's Online window when you leave the course. Otherwise you will still look like you're online to others. If you logoff, this window will show an error if left open.

    tip.gifStudents who have a dial-up connection should be advised to open their "Who's Online" window and minimize it during exams and quizzes. This keeps their connection active as the function scans for activity every six seconds, preventing their ISP from disconnecting them due to inactivity.


    * For additional information about Course Archives, see the Course Management Help Center Topic.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com



    4.6) Instant Messaging

    Knowledge Providers can send an invitation to Learners or other instructional staff for a one-to-one, two-way chat. To send an Instant Message request,the Knowledge Provider will click on the Who's Online link, and then click on the name of the user to whom they wish to initiate an Instant Message session. After clicking on the name of the user, the Knowledge Provider views a brief profile of the user and a link to send an invitation to Chat. The link and user profile information as it appears to the Knowledge Provider is displayed in the following image:

    instantmessage.gif

    The user receiving a chat request will see a message on their screen alerting them they've been invited to a chat. The user has the option of entering the chat or rejecting the chat. This dialogue is depicted in the image below:

    instantmessage2.gif

    The image below shows an example of an Instant Messaging session in progress. Note on the bottom panel of the window that the sender is pushing a learning object through the Instant Messaging interface. The recipient will automatically see the file that has been sent using the ojbect ID command. As well, note that the entire Instant Messaging session can be e-mailed to the user. The Knowledge Provider or Learner has the option of e-mailing the content of the chat to his or herself. In addition, by placing a comma after the users e-mail address, the user can send copies of the chat to additional e-mail addresses.

    instantmessage3.gif

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    4.6.1) Broadcasting Messages



    Broadcast Message: A one-way instant popup message sent to all students currently in a course(s).


    QuickStart Directions


  • Click on the Who's Online main navigation link.
  • Click on the Broadcast Message link.
  • Type your message in the textbox that appears.
  • Click on the [Submit] button.
    Your students will receive the message upon their next action within the course.

    Details


    Knowledge Providers have the ability to Broadcast Messages to all Learners signed into the course at a particular moment in time. Whenever two or more Learners are signed into the course, the Broadcast Message link appears as depicted below:

    broadcast1.gif

    In the following example, the Knowledge Provider has requested that the two Learners signed into the course meet in the Chatroom with the Knowledge Provider. Note that in this scenario, the contents of the General Chatroom session would be available to all Learners who did not participate in the Chatroom discussion. The Learners would simply access the Chatroom logs sublink located under the Chatroom Main Link.

    broadcast2.gif

    Educator will report to you as each student receives the message. This is dependent upon when he or she next performs an action in the classroom. The image below shows the status of the Broadcast Message.

    broadcast3.gif

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    4.7) Paging Center



    Paging Center: Utility that allows instructors to input their pager or cell phone numbers into a course in order to allow all or select students to contact them.


    Knowledge Providers can utilize the Paging Center in Educator to increase the number of interactions and communication opportunities in the course. The Paging Center tool supports communications between Learners and Knowledge Providers who can communicate with each other at their cell phones and or pagers via an Educator course.

    Knowledge Providers can locate the Paging Center sublink by going to the Announcements main link on the navigation column.

    The example shown below illustrates two different situations. The checkmark in front of the student's name indicates that you are giving that student permission to page you at the number you entered into Educator.

    Underneath that shows a student that gave you permission to page them in their paging center.

    pagingcenter.gif

    Knowledge Providers and Learners utilize pagers by entering in the e-mail addresses of the phone or paging devices that are capable of receiving alphanumeric text messages. Learners who have given permission to the Knowledge Provider to page them have an indicator posted next to their name (shown above). Learners receive a similar indicator in their Paging Center that lets them know if the instructor in their course is accepting pages.

    pagingcenter2.gif

    Users are responsible for any charges incurred from cell phone or pager providers.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    5) Evaluating Learners



    Evaluation Object: Any scored item in Educator including assignments, worksheets, exams, quizzes and surveys. Also self-assessments such as practice tests.


    Instructors can utilize a wide range of tools in Educator to effectively Evaluate Learners. These tools help the Knowledge Provider to gain an understanding of the Learners proximity to the instructional objective.

    The evaluation tools vary in form and function depending on the delivery structure desired by the Instructor.

    Within the Educator system, learning objects (you may simply think of these as files) that are used for evaluation purposes are called Evaluation Learning Objects.

    The various types of Evaluation Learning Objects are displayed in the table below. Note the subtle differences in design, function and purpose:

    Exam Quizz Worksheet Survey Assignment Practice Test Tasksheets*
    Machine Scored Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No
    Multiple Choice Questions Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No
    True/False Questions Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No
    Fill-In-The-Blank Questions Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No
    Essay Questions Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes
    Matching Questions Yes No Yes No No No No
    Timed Yes No No No No No No
    Due Date Yes Yes No No Yes No No
    Gradebook Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No
    Upload from Desktop Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
    Scramble Questions Yes No No No No No No



    *Although Tasksheets are more a method of assigning other evaluation objects, they do have a feedback mechanism and so are included here as a more informal method of evaluation.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com






    5.1) Quizzes

    Quiz: An formal evaluation object that has six objective question formats, but no subjective (essay) format, and cannot be timed, scrambled from groups or proctored.
    (See exams)


    Quizzes can deliver questions in the following four formats:

  • Multiple Choice
  • Fill In The Blank (Math Questions)
  • Fill In The Blank (Non Math Questions);
  • True/False

    Quizzes can be created online using the Educator quiz template or uploaded from a text file prepared offline.

    The steps for creating a quiz using Educator's easy-to-use online templates are provided below.
  • First click the quiz main navigation link and locate the new quiz sublink from the navigation panel.
  • Enter a name for the quiz and the number of questions (this example shows three)
  • Click the [Get Started!] button.

    newquiz1.gif

  • Next, specify the question fromat from the pull-downs next to each question,

  • Click the [Continue] button.

    newquiz2.gif

  • Specify the parameters, if needed, for each question. Parameters include such things as the nnumber of choices for the multiple choice questions and the number of blanks that will be included in each question for the fill-in-the-blank questions.

    newquiz3.gif

  • Build the questions, specifying the correct answer and specifying the point value of each question.

    newquiz4.gif

    Once you have created all of the questions and have submitted the form, you will see a quiz control panel. This screen provides deeper levels of control such as the ability to build feedback for correctly or incorrectly answered questions and the controls for activation or deactivation. You can also specify a due date and time, set the answer key to be displayed on submission or after the due date and time, and can set whether a grade can be displayed to the student.

    newquiz5.gif

    If you need greater control over an assessment than this, such as question groups, timed testing or proctoring, please see the Educator Exam feature.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    5.2) Exams


    Exams: An formal evaluation object that has six objective question formats, one subjective (essay) format, can be timed, scrambled from groups and proctored.
    (See quizzes)

    The Exam is one of Educator's most robust evaluation learning objects. You can create Exams with questions in the following formats:

  • Multiple Choice
  • Fill In The Blank (Math Questions)
  • Fill In The Blank (Non Math Questions)
  • True/False
  • Matching
  • Essay

    Exams can either be created online or uploaded from a text file created offline.

    The steps involved in creating an Exam using the Educator template follow.

    In the example below, only one group of 6 questions is being formed. Note that large numbers of questions can be created and the system set up to randomly pull a set of questions. Using this tool, Knowledge Providers can generate Exams that pull random questions and place them on each student Exam so that no two students receive the exact same Exam. If a Knowledge Provider wanted to have 6 questions on each Exam but wanted each Exam to vary, he or she could create a bank of questions and indicate the number desired on each Exam and select the Scramble option.

    Knowledge Providers can locate the Exam Main Link on the Navigation Panel on the left hand side of the screen.

    newexam1.gif

    Below, the Knowledge Provider is specifying the question format:

    newexam1a.gif

    Below, the Knowledge Provider is indicating the number of Multiple Choice questions and the number of fill-in-the-blank answers:

    newexam2.gif

    Below, the Knowledge Provider is entering the question content:

    newexam3.gif

    Below, the Knowledge Provider is placing settings in the Exam Control Center:

    newexam5.gif

    Lets look at another scenario. Say that the Knowledge Provider indicates the name of the Exam and the number of questions in the above scenario (the first image) but decides to place 5 groups of questions in the question bank for a total of 25 questions (each group contains 5 questions).

    In this scenario, a Knowledge Provider wants to scramble grouped Exam questions so that no two students receive the exact same Exam. The Knowledge Provider wants certain groups of questions to be bundled together because all relate to a specific sub-topic and will require the students to refer to a table in order to answer a series of questions about that table. When completing the questions, the Knowledge Provider indicates which of the groups the question belongs to (2,3,4, or 5) in this scenario.

    Note in the first scenario (second image from top), that there are no pull-downs next to the question format fields in which to enter the group number. Why? Because in the first screen, the user indicated there is only one group. Had the user selected to have 5 groups of a total 25 questions, then 25 questions would appear and there would be a pull-down next to each question format to indicate which group the question belonged to.

    With the above conditions set, the Knowledge Provider can now choose from three question distribution methods.

  • If Distribution is Uniform, all 25 questions from the question bank are displayed in each Learner Exam in the order in which they were entered (not in groups)

  • If Distribution is Scramble All, the Knowledge Provider can choose how many of the total number of questions should be on each student's exam form. If as in our scenario, 25 questions total were placed in the question bank and 10 is the total number of questions desired on each student's exam, then each student would get 10 questions randomly generated from the 25 delivered in random order (this is not delivered in random scrambled groups either)

  • If Distribution is Scramble Grouped, the Knowledge Provider can choose the number of groups of questions to be displayed on each Learners Exams. Say the Knowledge Provider in the this scenario wanted two groups of 5 questions to appear on each students Exam. By selecting 2 of 5 groups should appear on each students Exam form, the program randomly choses 2 groups from the 5 groups total. Each student would receive a test with 10 questions and the groups would appear in random order. Obviously in this case, students would likely receive some question groups that are the same because there are only 5 groups of questions. Knowledge Providers can create as many groups as they desire

    See the Question Distribution Unit in this Help Center for more information about Question Distribution options.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    5.2.1) Question Types

    Details

    Seven Exam Question Types are available in Educator (four formats for quizzes):
    • Multiple choice

    • - with optional choice-by-choice point control: Each answer can be assigned different point values to allow for degrees of correct responses.

      - Using checkboxes: To allow for more than one correct answer

      - Using radio buttons : To restrict choices to one correct answer


    • True/False


    • Fill In The Blank (Non Math)

    • - Non-numerical answer expected


    • Fill In The Blank (Math)

    • - only numbers allowed in the answer


    • Matching

    • - Match terms with definitions that are scrambled by Educator


    • Yes/No

    • - Similar to true/false but allowing a "not applicable" response.

      - Display N/A option: This allows the student to decide that neither "yes" nor "no" is applicable in the presented situation.

      - Give credit for N/A selection: If this is selected, then the point value of the question will be awarded for a correct answer or a response of N/A. If this is not selected, then only the correct answer will receive a point. An answer of N/A will result in point(s) being lost.


    • Essay

    • - Learner submits the essay and the Knowledge Provider manually grades essay component of exam
      - Scores on essay questions are automatically added to the scores of Educator-graded (system graded) questions for a final grade

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com



    5.2.2) Uploading an Exam

    This is an exerpt from the longer help center topic: Uploading Evaluation Learning Objects.

    Assessment objects in Educator are built upon question types. Syntax for each question type is provided below. Be sure you use the correct objects for the document you want to create. For example, you cannot upload an essay question into a quiz.
    etfmc1.gif

    etffib2.gif

    etftf3.gif

    etfess4.gif

    etfmatch5.gif

    etfyn6.gif



    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com




    5.2.3) Tolerance


    Fill-In-The-Blank questions in Educator have a special setting called Tolerance.

    Tolerance is set differently depending on whether the question is a math or non-math question.

    Tolerance for non-math questions

    tolerance1.gif

    A setting of Case Insensitive will require upper case and lower case characters from the submitted answer to match what is keyed into the answer key. In exams, you may also set the number of consecutive letters that count as a correct answer. This allows for misspellings. However, care should be taken not to set the number too low, which could account for any answer being accepted, or too high, which defeats the purpose. However, it's more accurate to err on the high side than low.

    Tolerance for math questions

    tolerance2.gif

    In the above example, the target answer has been set to 7.075. However since a tolerance of .01 has been set, any answer betweeen 7.075 - .01 and 7.075 + .01 (7.065 to 7.085) will be given full credit.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    5.2.4) Control Panel


    Exam Control Panel: Table at the top of the exam edit page that allows you to manipulate the completed exam file. To get to the control panel, click on the Exams main navigation link, and then the Modify link next to the name of the appropriate exam.


    Details


    examcontrolpanelshaded.gif


    The exam control panel contains many familiar file controls. There are a few new ones, however unique to exams:
  • Adding and Removing questions
  • Arranging, copying and moving questions
  • Setting Outcomes
  • Advanced Tracking
  • View as educator text file


  • Let's look at each of these one by one...

    Adding and Removing questions

  • Click on Remove Questions in order to access a listing of your exam questions
  • Click the checkbox in front of the question(s) you want to remove.
  • Click the [Submit] button.
    Removing questions will not affect the points assigned to the remainder of the questions.

  • Click on Add Questions in order to access the exam wizard.
  • Fill in the number of questions you wish to add.
  • Then select the question format(s)
  • Assign the question(s) to a group if necessary
  • Set the parameters for the format if necessary.
  • Click the [Submit] button.
  • Fill in the questions and answers along with feedback where desired.
  • You may either set the question point value now or set the entire exam to uniform values later.
  • Click the [Submit] button.
  • The questions will be placed at the end of the current exam.
  • In order to move questions to a new position in the exam, use the Arrange Questions link in the control panel.



    Arranging, copying and moving questions

  • Click on Arrange Questions to reach a listing of exam questions with a dropdown menu denoting its current position in front of each.
  • Change the order of each question by assigning it a new position.

    examarrangequestions1.gif

  • Click the [Submit] button.
  • Click on Copy/Move Questions to copy or move questions from the current exam to another exam. Copy will leave the question in the current exam. Move will remove the question from the current exam and place it in another exam.


    Setting Outcomes

    Setting outcomes means that you specify where the learner will go next based upon his or her score on an assessment. Outcomes can be set for exams, quizzes and surveys.
  • Click on Set Outcomes link in the control panel.
  • Specify the number of outcomes you wish to set. For example, if you want students who score above a minimum score to go on to the next packet, and students who fail to reach that score start over in the current packet, you would specify two outcomes.
  • Click the [Submit] button.
  • On the next screen, specify the score range that applies to each outcome.
  • Then specify the outcome itself...in other words, the object that should appear if the score falls within that range.

    outcomes3.gif
    This example shows an exam being prepared with three outcomes.


    Once you submit, you will view the settings along with links to the file that each outcome points to.

    outcomes4.gif

    To change outcomes once they've been set, return to the exam control panel. Your link to outcomes will now read Review Outcomes. Remove the current outcomes in order to set new ones.


    Advanced Tracking

  • Click on Advanced Tracking to search for learners by exam score or progress made.

    tracking1.gif

    Educator will bring up a list of students who fit the criterion set along with options to email, add students to group, assign them to a packet or force them to an object the next time they log in.

    tracking2.gif


    View as educator text file

    Educator will recognize any evaluation objects you upload by the special syntax you use to create such an object. Once an exam has been uploaded into Educator, you may want to access the text file once again so that you can add, remove or edit questions on a large scale. To do view the original text file content, use the View as Educator Text File link in the exam control panel. The only difference between the file that appears and the one you uploaded is that Educator has marked up this file with end of line and end of question markers. You need not use these markers yourself. Just add questions using the same syntax you would use if you were going to upload a new file. If you do want to model your new questions using the end of line markers, be careful not to duplicate question numbers. However, it's usually best to let Educator put the line markers in for you.
    To edit an exam file,
  • Click on View as Educator Text File link in the exam control panel.
  • A popup will appear with directions to highlight, copy and paste the contents of the next screen in order to recreate your exam text file.
  • Click on [OK]

    examviewastexthighlightpopup.gif


    You'll see a file containing test quesitons that looks something like this:

    essay:You are the president of the fictitious ACME Marketing Services Group in New York City. Create an effective sig file below.###1#^
    points:1#^
    hint:See Zimmerman, Page 105#^

    mc:radio:Which of the following is an example of rudeness according to the unspoken rules of Netiquette?###2#^
    sending spam.#^
    x-TYPING MESSAGES IN CAPITAL LETTERS.#^
    not answering unsolicited email.#^
    joining a discussion list and then only reading postings and never making a contribution.#^
    points:1#^
    hint:Zimmerman, page 114#^

    The question number is marked with three pound signs and a number: ###1

    The end of a line is marked with a pound sign followed by a carat: #^


    Once you highlight, copy and paste the contents of this screen into a text editor such as Notepad or TextEdit, you may then delete or add questions. To add a question, you need only type the syntax without the line markers. The following is an example of a true-false question that you could append to the above exam:
    tf:It's possible to use the VIEW AS TEXT FILE option to merge two exams together as long as you are careful not to duplicate question numbers.
    true
    points:1
    hint:This material was covered in the tutorial titled Control Panel.


    Once you have completed adding and/or editing questions, save it again as a textfile and the upload it to Educator as a special object. Educator will recognize it as an exam because of the syntax. You will even have an option to replace the original exam with this one after you upload it.


    Frequently Asked Questions

    Q. What happens if I make changes to an exam after it's been taken?
      A. It depends.
    • If you have the exam set up to scramble questions out of a larger pool, then nothing will happen if you add a question. Those who took the exam will see no changes. Those who have not yet taken the exam will have the added question in their pool. Statistics showing the percentage of people getting that question will be skewed.
    • If you have the exam set up to give uniform questions and add a question, then anyone who has not yet taken the exam will have one more question than people who have already taken the exam. Those who have taken it will see their score change. For example, instead of a 10/10 score, they will have 10/11.
    • Removing questions have a greater affect on exams that have already been taken. If the student's exam contains a question that is later removed, the scoring will be affected. Using the above example, instead of a 10 out of 10, the score will be 10/9.
    • Moving a question to another exam will have the same effect as removing the question.
    • Copying the question from one exam to another has no effect on the original exam whether taken or not.



    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    5.2.5) Control Center

    The exam control center allows you to set timing, distribution and delivery restrictions for each individual exam. Here is a point-by-point explanation of each setting.

    examcontrolcenter1.gif







    examcontrolcenter2.gif










    examcontrolcenter3.gif
    OBJECT ID: Insert OBJECT ID tag to link to or embed object.

    STATUS:
    ACTIVE: Exam is available to all learners.
    INACTIVE: Exam available to select or no learners. (to select learners, click inactive in the exam main menu) If an exam is inactive, students will not see a link to the exam.
    PREVIEW: The exam link will be visible along with due date information, but the exam will not display until it is made active.


    DISTRIBUTION:
    UNIFORM: (default) Learners get same exam.
    SCRAMBLE ALL: questions given in random order.
    SCRAMBLE GROUPED question groups given in random order.
    If you choose SCRAMBLE ALL, specify the number of questions to be delivered out of a larger pool of questions. Students will not necessarily get the same questions.
    If you choose SCRAMBLE GROUPED, specify the number of question groups out of a larger number of groups. Students will not get the same groups.
    See the Help Center section Question Distribution for more detail

    DUE DATE: Specify month, date, year and time of day that the exam should be made inaccessible to students.

    TIME LIMIT: Set number of hours or minutes that the student should be given to complete the exam.
    caution.gifIf you specify minutes, you must specify hours. If exam is less than one hour, use 0 hours.
  • If no time limit, leave at the default: none.
  • If no time limit, don't check the checkbox stipulating that no submissions should be accepted after the time limit expires.

    SINGLE ACCESS:
    NO (default) If a student loses a connection during an exam, access is still possible. The time limit does not restart.
    YES means that students may not access an exam a second time for any reason without the instructor manually removing the first attempt which resets the time limit.

    FEEDBACK:
    YES: you will provide feedback to each question.
    NO hides feedback from students even if present.

    PROCTORS:
    YES activates a form where proctor information and passwords are stored.
    NO hides proctor settings.
    See the Help Center section on Proctored Exams

    ANSWER KEY:
    UPON SUBMISSION (default) Learner will see answer key immediately.
    AFTER DUE DATE: Shows date that answer key will be available.
    NEVER: No answers ever provided.
    caution.gifIf the answer key is provided after the due date, it will be visible to anyone who has not yet taken the exam.

  • QUESTION GROUPS:
    Indicates total number of question groups on exam.

    EXAM INSTRUCTIONS:
    Directions pertaining to exam content visible upon entry to exam. (Time limits and due date are visible to learners before they begin the exam)

    IP ADDRESSES:
    List IP addresses here to restrict users to specific workstations.
    See the Help Center section on IP Restrictions

    REGULATE POINT VALUES
    Click this to open a window where you can input a value that each question should be worth. If each question has a different value, you must input each one separately. Choose MODIFY ALL QUESTIONS to do this.


    tip.gifTips!
  • Use publisher-provided textbook references (from most testbanks) as feedback to your exam questions to reduce student challenges.
  • If your exam is set to allow one access only, you may allow a student a second chance by removing the first exam record even if it hasn't yet been submitted. Go to the exam gradebook and click on the student's submission. At the top of the page, click the REMOVE SUBMISSION link. You will be asked to verify your action. This guards against inadvertent removals.




  • Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com



    5.2.6) Question Distribution

    Question Distribution: This refers to the manner in which exam or quiz questions are delivered to students

  • Uniform - each student gets an identical test

  • Scrambled All - Students get the same questions in a different order

  • Scrambled Grouped - Students get different questions pulled from different question groups. The number of different questions depends on the size of the question groups.


  • There is a Question Distribution option in the exam or quiz control panel where you can select from a pulldown menu either:

  • Uniform
  • Scramble All
  • Scramble Grouped

    The Uniform option ensures each learner receives the same exam form with the same order and number of questions. With the Uniform option every question on the exam is used.

    If the distribution is set to Scramble All, each learner will get a different set of questions pulled at random from the total population of questions on the exam. The degree of randomness can be set by using the pull down menu letting you specify how many questions should be on each exam from the question population. For example, 15 out of 50 questions.

    You can also assign a Group Number to each question and then choose the distribution Scramble Grouped. In this case, groups of questions will be randomly distributed to the learners. A scenario of where the Scramble Grouped option would be useful is if an exam had 3 questions that referred to an image found in one of the questions. If the Scramble All option was chosen, the sequencing and presentation of the 3 questions would be inconsistent. However with the Scramble Grouped option selected, the 3 questions would travel together.

    NOTE: In the setting for each group, if you choose Uniform, ALL questions within that group will be used regardless of the number of questions specified. If you choose Scramble, only the number of questions specified for that group will be used.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to Help Center>training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to href=mailto:support@ucompass.com?subject=Question from the Help Center>support@ucompass.com



    5.2.7) Scrambling Question Groups


    Randomizing Exam Questions within Groups: Groups of questions created in an exam are randomly selected and distributed to students.


    Details

    This is an extension of the exam tutorial. You must know the basics of putting together an exam before you can continue on to the more advanced technique of creating question groups. Please review the basic Exams tutorial if you need help with exam basics and before continuing with the following.


    If you use testbanks or have created pools of questions for each chapter of your textbook that you wish to randomly draw from, you may create corresponding groups within Educator, and have the Exams function create and distribute exams to students automatically.

    As soon as you click on the Create Exam sublink, you will be asked to supply the number of questions and the number of question groups that you want on the exam. The questions may be grouped by topic, chapter, textbooks, difficulty level, or any other way you see fit. The objective is to create several groups of questions, and then set Educator to randomly select a set number of questions from each group so that each student will get a different scrambled exam.

    examQdistributionscrambledgrouped2.gif

    Once you have input the number of groups you wish to create, you can continue as you would for any exam and create the questions. This time, when setting the question format, you will have an opportunity to set to which group each question should belong.
    After inputting all of the questions and answers or uploading the exam, you will then have to set the exam control center. Here is where the grouped exam differs from the simple uniform or scrambled exam.
    You must set the distribution option to read Scrambled Grouped.
    Then set the number of groups that you wish to include on this exam.

    Finally, in the Extra Options column you may designate which position in the exam any group should appear. For example, if group 2 is a group of essay questions, you might want to stipulate that the questions from that group appear first on the exam as shown in the example.

    examQdistributionscrambledgrouped1.gif

    At this time, you must click on the [Format Exam] button so that the group selection options will appear.

    This example shows an exam with 15 questions and three groups. All three of the groups are set to be included. The first and last 'anchors' are specified. One group is set to deliver a uniform or unscrambled set of questions while the other two are set to extrace 2 questions from each group and scramble them. The two questions randomly chosen from group two will appear as the first two questions on the exam.



    The [Format Exam] button must be pressed once again for these changes to be saved. Don't forget to set the due date and other exam controls.

    Tips

    tip.gif Educator expects groups to be numbered in whole numbers, sequentially. Although it may be tempting to number your groups according to chapters and sections...i.e. 1.03, 1.04, etc., this will result in errors. Don't skip numbers or use decimals.
    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    5.2.8) Proctored Exams

    A proctored exam requires the learner to arrange to take the exam in the constant presence of an acceptable person of authority. Each institution defines "acceptable".
    A proctor requirement can be imposed on any exam by setting the Require Proctor? option to Yes in the exam control center.


    How you use the Proctor feature depends upon whether you want students to secure their own proctors or if you want to assign proctors yourself. If you would like to have students find their own proctors and submit that information to you for approval, then use Method One. If you would like to select the proctor(s) yourself, and want to have passwords delivered to them without student involvement, then use Method Two. The quickstart directions applies to both methods.


  • QuickStart Directions


    To activate proctors:

  • Click on the Exams main navigator link.
  • Click on the Modify link next to the exam you want proctored.
  • Scroll down to Require Proctors and set it to Yes
  • Click [Format Exam] and the link send exam passwords to proctors appears.
  • examproctorInstructor1.gif


    Method One: Student-secured proctors

    Once you set the Require Proctors option to Yes, a form will appear to the student when he or she next clicks on the active exam link. Instead of the exam, the student will be asked to provide the name, phone number and email address of an appropriate proctor, and submit it for approval.



    Now you'll have to wait until all of the students have submitted proctoring information. Once all of the proctors have been approved, go back to the exam control center.
  • Click on the send exam passwords to proctors link (example above).


    If all students arranged different proctors

  • Place a checkmark in front of each student that has had his or her proctor approved.

  • Click on [Submit] to have Educator send a randomly generated password to the checked proctors.



    If students will have the same proctor...

    (for example, if a school librarian will be proctoring several students at the same time)


    Click on the manually add proctor passwords link.
  • examproctorInstructor2.gif




    You may now either

  • fill in a global password which will be sent out to all proctors, or
  • fill in individual passwords for certain proctors.

    Click [Submit] to complete the process.


    After this is completed, students may meet with proctors who will deliver the password. At that time, when the student enters the exam link, the password can be entered and the exam taken.
  • examproctorInstructor3.gif




    To Recap...The proctoring process is one that needs to be carefully planned because it takes time to carry it out.

    First:The exam itself needs to be created.
    Second:The Proctor Option needs to be selected in the exam control center.
    Third:The student needs to have a period of time to find and submit a proctor.
    Fourth:The proctor has to be approved by the instructor and the student notified of the approval or disapproval. In some cases, additional time may be required for the student to secure another proctor choice.
    Fifth:Finally, the passwords need to be sent out to the proctor before the actual time of examination.

    Method Two - Instructor-selected Proctors


    Some institutions already have a proctoring method in place utilizing librarians or learning center personnel. In this case, Educator can work with the system and allow the instructor to generate passwords that will be sent to an individual outside of educator. Students do not take part in the proctoring process, except to show up for the exam at a time designated by the instructor, where the proctor will dispense the password sent by Educator.

    Method Two begins the same way as Method One:
  • Click on the Exams main navigator link.
  • Click on the Modify link next to the exam you want proctored.
  • Scroll down to Require Proctors and set it to Yes
  • Click [Format Exam] and the link send exam passwords to proctors appears.
  • Click on the link to send exam passwords to proctors.
  • On the next screen click on Randomize all Passwords

  • examsproctorsrandomizepasswords2.gifNext enter the external email of the person to which you want to send the passwords.
    Note that this email must be outside the Educator system.


    Once you have submitted, the student list will reappear, this time displaying all of the passwords.examsproctorsrandomizepasswords3.gif



    examsproctorsrandomizepasswords4.gifA list of students and individual passwords will be sent to the proctor at the email address specified in step two.



    At this point when the student clicks on the exam link, a form will appear asking for the password, which can now be obtained from the proctor. examsproctorsrandomizepasswords5.gif


    Tips
    tip.gif To view a password that has been sent out to a proctor, go to the proctor list and click on the student's name.

    tip.gifIf you would like to track when exams are accessed and submitted, set the notification center under the Course Information link to notify you of this information.

    tip.gif Remember, when using the student-issued proctor method, (even if you as an instructor fill out the form for the student), you may use an Educator email address. However, when randomizing passwords, you must use an external email address--not an Educator course email address.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





  • 5.2.9) IP Address Restriction



    Course facilitators can regulate the network connections from which Learners are able to access their course or exam. Locate the IP Addresses Allowed text box in the modify exam dialogue.

    In the IP Addresses Allowed field, specify which network connections can access the exam form.

    In order to determine the IP Address of a specific location or machine, you may need to speak with an Information Technology specialist at your organization/institution.

    To restrict the entire course, go into the students' profile/grade summary where you will see the IP restriction box at the bottom of the screen. (Click SHOW ALL if necessary)

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    5.2.10) Makeup Exams

    Makeup tests can be handled in Educators in one of two ways: by extending the due date or by creating a new exam and manually entering the results into the original exam


    QuickStart Directions
    Method 1: Extend the deadline of the original exam.

  • Choose this option if the answer key has not been distributed.
  • Click on the Exams main navigator link
  • Click on the Modify link
  • Scroll down to the due date and change it to the extension date
  • It is not necessary to deactivate the exam itself. However, change the exam key /feedback display options to "never" or "after the due date" so that other students cannot get back into the exam.
  • Click [Format Exam]




  • Method 2. Create a brand new exam or a copy of the original exam
    To copy an exam:
  • click on the view as Educator text file link in the exam control panel.
  • highlight the text [ctrl][a]
  • open a text editor such as Notepad
  • paste the text [ctrl][v]
  • save as a text file (If using a word processor, this is critical)
  • in the course, click on the Course Materials main navigator link.
  • click on the Upload Center sublink.
  • click on the Browse button and locate the saved exam
  • highlight the exam filename and click the [Open] button
  • click on [Upload File!]
  • continue with the directions for new makeup exams

  • Locate the new or copied exam in the exam table listing
    examtable.gif

  • Click on the inactive link
  • Place a checkmark next to the name of the student that is to access the exam (other students will not even be able to see it)
    examselectstudent.gif
  • Click on [Submit]
    The exam status will still show inactive because to the majority of the class, it is inactive.

  • Tips!
    tip.gif If you would like to force the student into the exam, note the exam object ID number and click on the Forcing sublink under the Course Manager navigator link.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com



    5.3) Worksheets

    Worksheets are gradeable course documents that require students to input work directly into a form made up of text input boxes, which is then submitted directly into the course. Worksheets can be automatically scored, manually scored, or not scored at all.
    Worksheets are located under the Assignments main link in the navigation column.


    QuickStart Directions

    To create a worksheet:

    • Click on the Assignments link.
    • Click on the Worksheets sublink.
    • Click on the Create New Worksheet link in the main screen area.
    • Fill in the form with a worksheet name
    • specify the number of questions desired.
    • For each question, specify the format from the drop-down menu provided.
      worksheetcreate1.gif

    • Input each worksheet segment or question.
    • set the point values
    • Click finalize.

    All worksheets will be displayed in a table which shows the title, status and object ID number. In addition, options will be present to MODIFY or REMOVE your worksheet.


    To activate a worksheet:

  • Click on the Assignments link.
  • Click on the Worksheets sublink.
  • Click on MODIFY next to the worksheet you wish to activate
  • worksheetactivate.gif



    • In the worksheet control center, set the status to Active

    • Set Answer Key Options (default is to show correct and incorrect answers)

    Note that at a later date, after the due date, for example, you can come back here and set the worksheet to allow no more student submissions, while still allowing students to view their submitted work.
  • Specify grade builder contribution if desired.
  • Specify how many times students should be able to submit.
  • Click on [Submit]

  • Details...

    Worksheets are the most versatile of Educator learning objects. They can be fashioned into drill and practice exercises, tutorials, step-by-step instructional labs, or homework problem sets.

    worksheettutorial.gif

    How are Worksheets different from Exams?

    Worksheets do not have integrated due dates or time limits.
    There is no distinction between Fill In The Blank questions such as the math and non-math types of questions in the exams.
    There are no scrambling options.
    Essay answers can be set to automatically assign points upon submission.

    Like exams, however, Worksheets can be created online or uploaded from a text file created offline.


    Tips!
    tip.gif Instead of using a static document for a print lecture, use a worksheet form. At the end of the lecture, include a question that requires the student to submit questions, demonstrate understanding or some such response to the lecture material. Excellent for minute papers.

    tip.gifUse a worksheet to create a tutorial with step-by-step instructions that students must complete in the order given.


    tip.gifRemember that removing worksheets will also remove any associated student submissions!

    tip.gif Using Non-graded info exercises and specifying a point value will cause the essay style input from the student to automatically receive that point value upon submission...even if blank.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    5.4) Surveys

    Surveys: a polling tool that can be used as an anonymous or public measurement instrument. Surveys are found as a main link in the navigator column.

    QuickStart Directions

  • click on the SURVEYS link
  • input the number of survey questions
  • name your survey
  • click on [Get Started!]
  • Specify the number of choices you wish for each survey question. Or choose the "open-ended" option which provides a text-box for respondent input.
  • Click [Continue].
  • Fill in the survey status (active or inactive) and parameters (anonymous, public, etc)
  • Fill in the survey questions, choices or statements.
    Click [Continue]


    To view the results, modify, or remove the survey, click on the SURVEYS link in the Educator navigation column.
    Survey results may be exported to a spreadsheet application by choosing that link at the bottom of the results page.



    Details


    Knowledge Providers can use the Surveys feature to gather Learner information. To create a Survey, go to the New Survey sublink located under the Surveys Main Link on the Navigation Panel.

    There are two types of Survey questions, Multiple Choice and Open Ended.

    Surveys can be created online or uploaded from a text file created offline.

    Below is an example of a survey that was created online using an Educator template:

    surveys1.gif

    surveys2.gif

    surveys3.gif

    To view the results of Learner submissions, Knowledge Providers simply choose the Results option under the main list of surveys.

    Knowledge Providers are also given an option to export results to a spredsheet at the bottom of the results display page. To export results of the Survey, Knowledge Providers should scroll down the display page until the EXPORT RESULTS TO SPREADSHEET button appears. Click on this button to download a delimited text report of survey submissions.

    Usage Tips


    tip.gifSurvey's can be 'forced'. This means you can have them pop up as soon as a student enters the course by entering the survey object ID number in the Force tool. See the 'forcing' section under the Distributing Knowledge Help Center unit.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    5.5) Practice Tests



    Practice Test: An Educator assessment where questions are distributed one screen at a time and scores do not count toward a cumulative grade.


    QuickStart Directions
    • Click on the Exams main navigation link.
    • Click on the Practice Tests sublink.
    • Click on the New Practice Test link that will open the PT Wizard.
    • Enter the number of questions you wish to have on your test.
    • Enter a name for the test.
    • Select the question type. Questions may be either true/false, multiple-choice or fill-in-the-blank.
    • If you chose either multiple-choice or fill-in-the-blank, stipulate the parameters for each one: i.e. how many choices or correct responses you wish to provide.
    • Fill in the questions and answers.
    • Enter a hint to give students a second chance to get the correct answer.
    • Enter feedback to each question such as page references, why selections were incorrect or elaboration of the correct answer.
    • Specify whether questions should be delivered in random order.
    • Specify whether the test should be immediately available (active) or invisible (inactive) to students.
    • Click on [Continue].

    You may change the status (active or inactive) or edit the questions by clicking on the Modify link in the practice test display table.

    Details


    Knowledge Providers can use a Practice Test to give a self-paced content evaluation to Learners. The Practice Tests feature is a sublink located under the Exams main navigation link.

    Knowledge Providers can deliver Practice Tests created online in the test wizard or create the Practice Test file offline which is then uploaded to Educator. Note that the ability to create offline or online using an Educator template is a recurring methodology that can be applied to quizzes, exams and worksheets and other functions as well. A summary of syntax form can be found in the Help Center topic Uploading Evaluation Learning Objects .

    The Practice Tests deliver questions to the Learner one question at a time and provide an opportunity for feedback and remediation after each question.

    Since the setup process of Practice Tests is so similar to exams and quizzes previously covered, an example of a practice test event will be displayed below as opposed to an example of a practice test being constructed:

    practicetest1.gif

    practicetest2.gif

    practicetest3.gif

    Once the Practice Test has been completed, the Learner is given the answer key.
    Learners may also choose to retake the test again.

    Results on Practice Tests are not recorded, however, the Learner's participation on the practice test is. In other words, the Knowledge Provider can tell how many questions were answered but they cannot tell if they were answered correctly.

    You may rearrange the order in which the practice tests are listed by clicking on the Rearrange practice tests. You may then either change the layout number corresponding to each test, or click on the Flash-enhanced Arrange Practice Tests utility and drag and drop the tests into the order you want. Flash-seven player is necessary to use the Flash-enhanced utilities.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    5.6) External Assignments

    External Assignments are graded course documents that require students to complete work in an external application (word processor, spreadsheet, etc) and upload finished work into the course. These are not automatically scored.

    External assignments are located under the Assignments main link in the navigation column.

    QuickStart Directions
    Method one: Creating an Assignment using the Wizard

    • Click on the New Assignment sublink under the ASSIGNMENTS button.

    • Fill in the Assignment title, the due date, how many points the assignment is worth, how many times the student may submit work, and describe the assignment in detail.
    • If you wish to break down the total points for this assignment, indicate how many grading subsections you wish to include under Rubric Categories.

    • If you wish the score to be figured into the student's grade immediately, fill in the gradebuilder value. Otherwise, leave blank until you come back to grade the assignments.

    • Set the STATUS to active or inactive. For students to be able to view the assignment, it must be set to ACTIVE.

    • Submit.
    assignmentform.gif


    Method two: Uploading an Assignment

    An assignment may be prepared offline according to a specific format and uploaded to Educator. The syntax follows:
    title:Add assignment title here. This is a required field
    due:Add due date here. This is a required field
    details:Add assignment directions here. This is a required field.
    Length is not limited--the text input box will scroll to accommodate large bodies of text. Images and links may be embedded as well.

    Once you have created the document, supplying all three field names with a colon separating them from the information, you must save it as a text (.txt) file. Then
    • go to Course Materials

    • click on the sublink, Upload Center

    • Scroll down to the bottom of the screen and click on upload educator object.

    • [Browse] for your saved file.

    • Highlight the filename and click on OPEN

    • Click on [Upload File!]




    Details...

    Once you have created assignments, they will appear in the Assignments Main Menu along with their current status, due date and the object ID.
    assignmenttable.gif

    The table also provides options to
  • VIEW as a student
  • MODIFY existing content
  • GRADE submissions
  • REMOVE assignment

    caution.gifCAUTION: Clicking on REMOVE will delete the assignment along with any student submissions. Please be careful when using any "REMOVE" options. If you accidentally remove something that has student records attached, please report it immediately using procedures developed by your local Educator Administrator.

    Note the advanced features at the bottom of the list that allow you to modify multiple assignment settings simultaneously.

    • Fast Assignment Editing allows you to change the title, Status (Active or Inactive), Due dates, submission allowances and point value of all assignments from a single page.
    • Arrange Assignments allows you to change the order in which Assignments are listed.
    • Assignment Status Control allows you to activate or deactivate multiple assignments from a single page.

  • tip.gif Tips!
  • For ease of grading, be sure to direct students to upload assignments from the assignment page, not the upload center. This ensures that the file that is uploaded is associated with the correct assignment.
  • There is a mechanism for cutting off additional submissions even if an assignment is originally set to 'unlimited submissions'. When you are in the assignment grading area, check the []Allow no more submissions checkbox.



  • Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    5.6.1) Rubrics

    A Rubric is a scoring template that defines behaviors required to meet certain standards. These standards may be qualitative (excellent, good, average, poor), but, in order to be used as a grading tool, these qualitative standards must be mapped to numerical scores.
    Rubrics are a part of the Assignments form.


    QuickStart Directions

    In the assignments form, fill in the number of categories you would like to have in your rubric. Upon submission, additional fields will be created.
    assignmentrubric.gif
    Fill in each category with a short description of the behavior you will be grading.

    Assign the number of points to each category, making sure that they add up to the total assignment score.

    When you are finished, click [Submit] to save the rubric within your assignment form.



    Details...

    By creating a rubric, you set the standards for any assignment you give. Students are aware of the level of performance they must attain in order to get a particular grade. Itís also easier for you to grade according to set standards.
    When you are ready to grade the assignment, simply go to the gradebook or workload icon. The rubric will appear in each student's grade form. Fill in each blank category as you assess the student's submission.


    tip.gifTips!
  • Each rubric appears in the student's grade report, so brevity is important. If categories require a lengthy explanation, do so in the assignment details.

  • Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com



    5.6.2) Grading External Assignments

    For your convenience, assignment submissions may be accessed from several places:
  • the assignment gradebook
  • the workload feature in the Educator toolbar
  • the student's folder
  • the student's grade report.
    They all lead to the same grading form shown in the tutorial below.


  • QuickStart Directions
    In this example, we'll outline the grading procedures from the GRADEBOOK area as illustrated:
    assignmentgrade1.gif
  • Click on the GRADEBOOK for any assignment (1)
  • Click on the "Submitted" progress link next to the student name (2)
  • Fill in the numerical grade and any comments you may wish to make about the student's submission (yellow shading below). You may specify that the grade and feedback be automatically sent to the student via email upon submission.

    assignmentgrade2.gif

  • You may restrict further submissions if you have set your assignment to allow multiple submissions.
  • Once you have finished grading the current submission, you may specify where you would like to go next upon submission. The default is to go back to the assignment Gradebook listing.



    If you prefer a Flash-enhanced gradebook, click on the Students main navigation link, and scroll down below your roster listing. You'll see links to the main gradebooks as well as a link to a small Grade Book. Click on that link and you'll be presented with a listing of all your assessments. Select one to input grades in the Flash gradebook.






  • tip.gifTips!
  • At the top of the Gradebook table is an option for Fast Gradebook Entry. Clicking this will display the class roster with a single grade entry slot for each student.
  • Encourage your students to check the Submit for Grading option when they upload their work. If they do not, the assignment remains in their workload and does not appear in yours.
  • Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com



    5.7) Uploading Evaluation Learning Objects

    Evaluation Learning Objects are files that are recognized by Educator to perform a function. Examples are exams, quizzes, assignments, practice tests, surveys, worksheets and glossaries.


    Syntax Summary Page
    This is a summary page of all Educator evaluation learning object syntax. Please see the individual learning object help center pages for a full description of the object and how it works.
    Prepare each document in a simple text editor such as Notepad, TextEdit or EditPad, save as a text document (.txt) and then upload through the Educator Upload Center.
    Exams, Quizzes, Worksheets and Practice Tests

    Assessment objects in Educator are built upon question types. Syntax for each question type is provided below. Be sure you use the correct objects for the document you want to create. For example, you cannot upload an essay question into a quiz.
    etfmc1.gif

    etffib2.gif

    etftf3.gif

    etfess4.gif

    etfmatch5.gif

    etfyn6.gif

    Assignments
    etfassign7.gif
    Glossaries
    etfgloss9.gif
    Surveys
    etfsurv10.gif
    Assignment Gradebook
    etfasgrade11.gif
    tip.gifTips!
  • In order to work properly files must be saved in plain text document format. If you are using a simple text editor, this is usually automatic. If you are using a word processor, you must choose the plain text save as... option.
  • Once uploaded as exams, quizzes or practice tests, files may be viewed in the Educator Text Format by choosing this option in the assessment control panel.


    caution.gifBe careful when using a word-processor such as Microsoft Word to upload text files. Hyphens are not the same as hyphens in normal text files. If you have a problem with your upload, and you find you are using a word-processor, make sure you Save as... plain text. If that still doesn't work, copy and paste your work into a simple text editor such as Windows Notepad (in accessories) or TextEdit for the Mac.

  • Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com



    5.7.1) Advanced Formats

    Knowledge Providers can use an Advanced Form of the Educator Text Format to more closely control the quiz and exams outcomes in Educator.

    In the previous examples, carriage returns indicate end-of-line commands. However, this may not be convenient if you wish to type lines of text that wrap to multiple lines.

    You can represent an end-of-line command with #^

    The best way to illustrate this is to break down an example:

    Multiple Choice Questions

    Look at the following question:

    advancedetf1.gif

    Now look at how the question appears in the Advanced Educator Text Format:

    advancedetf2.gif

    Non-Math Fill In The Blank Questions

    Look at the following question:

    advancedetf3.gif

    Now look at how the question appears in the Advanced Educator Text Format:

    advancedetf4.gif

    Math Fill In The Blank Questions

    The content of the question doesn't necessarily have to be a mathematics related question. It may simply be a question that requires a numberical response and therefore one in which the system Educator must be set up to recognize the numerical response.

    For instance, consider the following question:

    advancedetf5.gif

    Notice a tolerance of .5 around a target answer of 5.5. Therefore, any answer between 5 and 6 will be accepted.

    Here is how the question above looks in the Advanced Educator Text Format:

    advancedetf6.gif

    More Advanced Concepts


    This is an overview of some more advanced options regarding the editing of quizzes and exams. Clicking either the quiz or exams main navigation link will call up a table showing all of the exams or quizzes stored in the system. Under each quiz or exam name in the table is a link labeled View In Educator Text Format. See image below:

    reallyadvanced1.gif

    When that link is followed, the learning object opens in a new browser window in the Advanced Educator Text Format:

    reallyadvanced2.gif

    Notice in the capture above, there is a number at the end of each question that is circled. This is called the Question ID number.

    The number is assigned to each question automatically by Educator.

    The reason that numbers are assigned automatically is for instances where the Knowledge Provider wishes to download an exam or quiz into the Advanced Educator Text Format. The Knowledge Provider can then make changes to the text offline and upload those changes. In order for this to work appropriately, each question needs to have the Question ID.

    Knowledge Providers who edit the exam or quiz in a text editor and upload it into the platform to replace an exam or quiz already in existance, will be greeted with an interface similar to the following:

    reallyadvanced3.gif

    When replacing an exam that already exists, as is the case in the capture above, Question IDs in the uploaded text file will replace the corresponding Questions with a matching Question ID in the exam that is to be replaced. Otherwise, if a question does not have a Question ID, it will be added to the pre-existing exam.

    Common Mistakes

    Please take a moment to view common Educator Text Format mistakes. By viewing this, you will avoid time-consuming and often frustrating mistakes.

    One of the easiest mistakes to make is to put a line break in the middle of your question. (Typing habits die hard!) Educator recognizes the end of a question by the line break. So if you put one in before the end of the question, you will cut your question short. The solution is to type the entire question, letting the system wrap it naturally. Then at the end of the question, put in a line break, typing your first answer choice on the next new line.

    mistakes1.gif

    Another mistake that is easy to make is adding a new line within an existing formatted question, without adding the necessary formatting. If you're not sure what formatting to add, it's better to remove all formatting within that question and let Educator do it for you. (By formatting, we mean end of line symbols #^ and line numbers ###1, ###2, etc.) A totally formatted question is OK. A totally NON-formatted question is OK. A question that is half-formatted is not OK.

    mistakes2.gif

    Finally, when merging test questions by copying and pasting questions, make sure that the line numbers at the end of the questions are not duplicated.
    If you use questions 1-10 from an exam in one course and append them to questions from another course, they may be numbered 1-10 as well!
    You need to either erase one set of the numbers altogether and let Educator renumber them, or renumber them yourself.

    mc:Sample question. ###1#^
    answer1
    answer2
    x-answer3

    tf:Sample question ###2#^
    true

    tf:Merged question ###1#^ <--- either erase or change this to ###3#^
    false




    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    5.7.2) Really Advanced Concepts



    This is an overview of some more advanced options regarding the editing of quizzes and exams. Clicking either the quiz or exams main navigation link will call up a table showing all of the exams or quizzes stored in the system. Under each quiz or exam name in the table is a link labeled View In Educator Text Format. See image below:

    reallyadvanced1.gif

    When that link is followed, the learning object opens in a new browser window in the Advanced Educator Text Format:

    reallyadvanced2.gif

    Notice in the capture above, there is a number at the end of each question that is circled. This is called the Question ID number.

    The number is assigned to each question automatically by Educator.

    The reason that numbers are assigned automatically is for instances where the Knowledge Provider wishes to download an exam or quiz into the Advanced Educator Text Format. The Knowledge Provider can then make changes to the text offline and upload those changes. In order for this to work appropriately, each question needs to have the Question ID.

    Knowledge Providers who edit the exam or quiz in a text editor and upload it into the platform to replace an exam or quiz already in existance, will be greeted with an interface similar to the following:

    reallyadvanced3.gif

    When replacing an exam that already exists, as is the case in the capture above, Question IDs in the uploaded text file will replace the corresponding Questions with a matching Question ID in the exam that is to be replaced. Otherwise, if a question does not have a Question ID, it will be added to the pre-existing exam.

    Common Mistakes

    Please take a moment to view common Educator Text Format mistakes. By viewing this, you will avoid time-consuming and often frustrating mistakes.

    One of the easiest mistakes to make is to put a line break in the middle of your question. (Typing habits die hard!) Educator recognizes the end of a question by the line break. So if you put one in before the end of the question, you will cut your question short. The solution is to type the entire question, letting the system wrap it naturally. Then at the end of the question, put in a line break, typing your first answer choice on the next new line.

    mistakes1.gif

    Another mistake that is easy to make is adding a new line within an existing formatted question, without adding the necessary formatting. If you're not sure what formatting to add, it's better to remove all formatting within that question and let Educator do it for you. (By formatting, we mean end of line symbols #^ and line numbers ###1, ###2, etc.) A totally formatted question is OK. A totally NON-formatted question is OK. A question that is half-formatted is not OK.

    mistakes2.gif

    Finally, when merging test questions by copying and pasting questions, make sure that the line numbers at the end of the questions are not duplicated.
    If you use questions 1-10 from an exam in one course and append them to questions from another course, they may be numbered 1-10 as well!
    You need to either erase one set of the numbers altogether and let Educator renumber them, or renumber them yourself.

    mc:Sample question. ###1#^
    answer1
    answer2
    x-answer3

    tf:Sample question ###2#^
    true

    tf:Merged question ###1#^ <--- either erase or change this to ###3#^
    false


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    5.8) Lone Rearranger

    The Lone Rearranger: Use this tool to rearrange, rename, or remove Exams, Quizzes, Worksheets, Assignments, Packets, Discussion Groups, and Tasksheets. You may rearrange or rename as many items as you wish in each session.

    This new rearrange tool has two features: 1) regardless of the number of assessments and/or students, you may rearrange assessments at any time and 2) the grades and work associated with the assessments (including discussion boards) will remain tied to that assessment.


    NOTE: You must have at least version 9 of Flash installed in your browser to use this program. To install Flash 9, or to make sure you have the latest version, you may go to Adobe's website to download the free player. Also, please make sure popup blockers are turned off.


    TO USE THE TOOL:

    Click on the Toolbox on the horizontal icon bar at the bottom of any main page in Educator. You may have to scroll down in order to see the icon bar.

    screenwelcome.jpg

    Click on the Toolbox to open it. (See the instructions at the bottom of the page to create a button to the Rearranger on the Instructor's navigation bar.)

    screentoolbox.jpg

    Once the window opens, it will show you the list of Tools. Scroll down to the bottom of the list and you will find The Lone Rearranger.

    When you click on the link, the following page will load.

    screen.jpg

    The page will show the course ID for the course you're working on although you may change it at any time by clicking the dropdown box in the upper left corner.

    Each of the boxes above will show you the assessments you have and the order in which they are currently set.

    screenactive.jpg

    When you click on a box (see above), it will become opaque so you can clearly see the items listed in the box. When you click on an item, it will be highlighted in blue and then turn white with the words highlighted in black. This will allow you to rename the selection.

    To rename the item, just start typing or click where you wish to add more to the name. To keep the change, simply click on another item. This will save the name you've given the file temporarily. To make the change final, you will need to click the button Save Changes in the lower left corner.

    NOTE: Remember not to use characters such as @, #, $, %, ^, *, etc. in your Label Names. Also, please do not use html code in the Label Name.

    TIP: If you make a mistake, you can simply click Start Over in the lower left corner. This button will revert EVERYTHING you have changed back during this session to its original name and location.

    screenrename.jpg

    To move a file, simply drag it to the desired location by holding down the left mouse button. The dark line which appears is where the file will be dropped when you release the mouse button.

    screenmove.jpg

    If you wish to PERMANENTLY remove an item, you may drag it to the Trash cell in the far right lower corner. Once the item is in the Trash cell, the only way you can remove it is to click Start Over.

    screentrash.jpg

    When you have finished making your changes, click Save Changes to finalize the new settings. To return to your course, click Return to Educator.

    TO ADD A BUTTON ON THE NAVIGATION BAR:

    Click Customize on your Navigation Bar. By default, you will be on the Instructor view of the Navigation Bar.

    NOTE: Please make sure your institution allows changes to the navigation bar at the Instructor level; you may not be able to overwrite the navigation bar, or it may be overwritten during a nightly process.

    Whereever you would like the button to appear, click Add Button (1).

    addbutton.jpg

    In the URL field, simply type exactly what you see above (2).

    Scroll down to the bottom of the page and click Submit.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic. Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com




    5.9) Rearranging Objects


    Object Rearrangement Utility -- HTML Version: This utility allows you to re-order the list of objects that you have created in your course by changing each item's sequence number.


    QuickStart Directions

  • On any page that lists Educator objects (exams, assignments, worksheets, etc), there will be a Rearrange objects... link at the bottom of the list. Click on it to begin.

  • Your list of objects will appear with a column indicating each current layout position. Change the number of each one to reflect a new position.
  • You may not set two objects to the same layout number. If you assign a number that is already used, you must change that item to a new number.
  • Click on [Submit] to have the changes take effect.




    flashicon.gif
    Object Rearrangement Utility -- Flash Version: This utility allows you to re-order the list of documents that you have created in your course.

    Requires Flash Player version 7


    QuickStart Directions

  • A flash version of the rearrangement utility is also availiable to provide a drag-and-drop element to this feature that many prefer.
    Note:If the number of objects is more than 20 or you have more than 30 students in the course, this feature will not appear.

    It will appear after you've clicked on the Rearrange order... link at the bottom of an Educator object listing.
  • Click on the Flash Enhanced Rearrangement Utility link.
  • Click on any object in the list that appears
  • Holding down your mouse, move the object to the place where you wish to relocate it.
  • When you have finished moving your objects, click [Submit]
  • Click [OK] to acknowledge.


    Details


    The new Educator Flash-enhanced object re-arrangement utility will allow you to re-order any list of Educator objects by simply dragging and dropping the titles. This feature requires Flash Player 7 in order to work.

    At the bottom of the screen, below your current listing of educator objects in any main category: ie Assignments, Worksheets, Exams, Quizzes or Packets, you'll see two links that will allow you to rearrange the order in which the documents are listed. Rearrange order... will take you to the original non-Flash method. To use the new method, click on Flash Enhanced Rearrangement Utility.

    Next, a window displaying all of your objects in that category will appear. This example shows an exams list. We will move exam 09 from its current location to a new location between exam 1 and 2

    Highlight the title of the object that you wish to relocate.
    flashrearrangementutilitystep1.gif
    flashrearrangementutilitystep2.gif


    Holding down your right mouse button, move your mouse to position the title in its new location. Let go of the button to "drop" the title in place.
    Note: If your mouse is positioned towards the upper half of a title, the resource that you are dragging will drop above that title. If you move it so that it is positioned towards the lower half of a title, it will drop in place below that title.




    Move as many titles as you like. When you are finished, click on the [Submit] button.
    The list will be shaded slightly and a "busy" cue will appear, indicating that you will not be able to use your browser for the moments that the rearrangement is occurring.
    flashrearrangementutilitystep4.gif
    flashrearrangementutilitystep5.gif


    When the action is completed, click on the [OK] to acknowledge


    Usage Tips

    tip.gifIf you don't have Flash Player 7, and attempt to use the Flash-enhanced rearrangement utility, you may get an error or you may just get a blank screen, depending upon your browser. It is strongly recommended that you download the flash player from the Macromedia home page in order to enhance your experience in Educator.


    tip.gifRemember that if your number of objects reaches 20 or the number of students in the course reaches 30, the Flash Rearrangement Utility will not appear as an option. To rearrange the display of the objects in the students' grade summary, use the Gradebuilder function.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com




    5.10) Outcomes

    Outcomes: In Educator outcomes refer to the ability to set the path of the student's next activity based on the outcome of an assessment score. Outcomes are definable in surveys, quizzes, exams and worksheets.

    You can set Outcomes that will direct Learners to pre-determined learning objects upon submitting a quiz, exam, or worksheet. The learning object delivered is dependent upon the score earned by the Learner. Knowledge Providers are able to customize learning materials to the performance levels of Learners as determined by their score on an evaluation object. In other words, the Outcomes feature lets you specify which content a learner will see upon earning a specific score on a quiz, exam or worksheet. You can also set outcomes to Surveys if that survey contains only one question with two or more choices. Surveys with more than one question will not offer an option to set outcomes.

    Instructors can set Outcomes by going to the Quiz, Exam, or Survey Main Link in the Navigation Panel and clicking on the Modify link next to the name of the evaluation object they wish use. Locate the SET OUTCOMES link in the top control panel.

    outcomes1.gif

    You will be asked to input the number of outcomes you wish to set. You can set as many outcomes based on scores as you like.

    outcomes2.gif

    Have the object ID of the documents in which you would like these scores to culminate ready because you'll have to input them next.

    outcomes3.gif

    In our example of Outcomes shown here, 3 separate outcomes are set for an exam:

  • Learners who score 85 and above would be taken to a graphic alerting them they've achieved an exemplary score. This corresponds to object ID #101.
  • Learners who score between 75 and 85 would be taken to a graphic congratulating them for receiving the necessary score to move on to the next topic. (Object #87)
  • Learners who score below 65 would be taken to remedial content. (Object #65)

    outcomes4.gif



    Surveys


    You can also set Outcomes for a survey that ONLY HAS ONE QUESTION. In this case the Outcome is not a function of the score earned, but the answer to a specific question.

    An example of this appears below:

    Begin by choosing the Set Outcomes link in the control panel.

    outcomes5.gif

    The outcomes are set by ID numbers exactly as in the exam example above. The only difference is that the outcome is based on a choice the student makes.
    So, for example, if the student in the example below chooses Physics he or she will be taken to object #89 upon submission.
    outcomes6.gif

    Object #89 is the packet on Physics.

    outcomes7.gif


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    5.11) Student Folders


    Student Folders: Area where students upload and store their course work. Instructors can also distribute materials to student folders. Student folders are a sublink under the main Course Materials link.

    QuickStart Directions

    To view student folder contents

  • Click the [COURSE MATERIALS] main link
  • Click the Student Folders sublink
  • Click on a student's name to view the contents of their folder
  • To open a file within a student's folder, click on the file name.

    To place a file into student folders

  • Click the [COURSE MATERIALS] main link
  • Click the Upload Center sublink
  • [Browse] for the file you wish to upload.
  • Highlight the file once you have located it on your computer drive, then click [Open]
  • Click on the [Upload File] button.
  • After the upload is complete, click on COPY TO STUDENT
  • Select the student folders into which you wish to copy the file.
  • Type a note to accompany the file if appropriate.
  • Click [Submit]

    Details

    The main purpose for the student folders is so that students have a private area where they can upload and store work that they have created for their online course. These files may be associated with specific assignments and therefore, instructors may enter student folders for the purpose of grading these file submissions. This is not the main method of grading assignments. See the Assignments Packet for additional information

    Instructors may also upload files to the student folders.
    Let's look at each of these scenarios below.

    studentfolders1.gif

    This image shows the screen upon entering the Student Folder sublink in the main navigator column.

    Each student folder is listed. If they have uploaded any files, the most recent will be visible outside the folder.

    To view all files uploaded by a particular student, you must enter their folder.

    To display all contents of all folders, click on Show all student files

    If you would like to download all student files and view them offline, click on Download folder to desktop.

    You can allow students to view the contents of each other's folders by changing the student folder settings at the top of the list. The default is locked. Unlocking this setting will allow you or the student to unlock each individual folder.


    Entering the student folder


    studentfolders2.gif

    Click on any student folder to view the contents.

    You will also be able to upload to the folder, modify the folder (unlock or lock it), or download the folder to your desktop so that you can view the contents when you are offline. This is useful for external assignments, such as word documents, that need to be open by an external application. (If you make any changes to the downloaded file, you must re-upload it again, for the changes to be visible to the student).

    Note that you or the student may also create subfolders. This is useful for segregating files that are all associated with a single assignment. That way, downloading the folder will only download pertinent files, and not all files.
    Note too, that instructor-loaded files are so designated.

    Each student file has an object ID number that begins with the letter "s". This number identifies the document within the system.



    Viewing a student file

    studentfolders3.gif

    Click on any file within a student folder to view that file. The first thing you will see is the file information page as shown to the left.

    If the file is web-viewable, you will have links that will allow you to VIEW or EDIT the file.

    If the file is not web-viewable, clicking on the filename will initiate a download to your desktop, where you may open the file with the appropriate application. The screen at left shows a non-web-viewable Word document (Oct.doc).

    The file information page indicates whether that file is or should be associated with an assignment. Changing the Association from NONE to a specific assignment will allow you to grade that file and provide assignment feedback to the student.

    If you would like to share the file with other students in the course, you may click on the link to Grant access to specific classmates/groups. (Groups will be explained in the discussion board area)

    The student grade report, which is accessible from this and many other locations, will be explained in the packet that deals with student evaluation and grading.



    Usage Tips

    tip.gifTo allow students to download and edit a single document, consider putting it in a common folder and then pasting the link in your lecture, assignment or discussion posting. Then if you need to edit the document yourself, you can make the change in one place and re-upload it with the same file name. The link won't change but the document will. The key is to keep using the same file name. If you want a record of the original documents, rename them document1.doc, document2.doc, etc. This is much easier than uploading a copy to each student folder. If changes have to be made once it's uploaded, you'll have to re-upload the changed document to each student again.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    5.12) Student Home Pages


    Knowledge Providers may want Learners to post a link to their personal web pages. These can be found by clicking the Home Pages sublink under the Students main link in the navigation panel. Each Learner has to post the URL to their personal web page or indicate an Educator file within the course before it can become listed on the Home Pages table.

    homepagestudentview.gifLearners can do this by accessing the Home Pages sublink under the Students main link. They will see a place to type in a URL or check a file stored in their student folder.

    The image at left is the student view.

    The image at right depicts the instructor's view.
    Click on the student's name to view their home page.

    Use the checkmarks only to remove any home pages individually.
    studentshomepages.gif


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    5.13) Attendance

    Attendance: A utility that allows you to track whether students are present, tardy or absent, or any other condition that you set, on a daily basis.


    QuickStart Directions

  • Click on the Students
    main navigation link.
  • Click on the Take Attendancesublink.
  • Modify the headings at the top of each column if you wish.
  • Mark each student
  • Click on [Save]
  • This record will be saved to the attendance archives. To view them or any other attendance record, click on Archives

    Details
    The Attendance feature was designed for use when Educator augments face-to-face classroom-based instruction.

    The columns default to Present, Tardy and Absent. You may change these headings. For example, you can change the headings to Tardy, Excused and Absent if you wish to assume those not so marked are present. Once you change the column headings, they will default to the new settings.

    There is an option for a default attendance that you can set. This means that you can choose any of the three categories to be prefilled. For example, if you wished everyone to be marked as present when you open the attendance sheet, then you would choose Present as your default setting. After you submit the first attendance set this way, future attendance sheets will have the present column filled in.

    Below is an example of the Attendance function:

    attendance1.gif

    Usage Tips

    tip.gif Don't forget that this sublink can be hidden if this feature is not used. See the tutorial section on Customization in this Help Ceneter.
    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    5.14) Grade Builder



    GradeBuilder: Educator tool that tracks and displays all evaluation objects that contribute to a student's final course grade.


    Knowledge Providers can use the Grade Builder tool to specify the weight of each evaluation learning object and the degree to which it should contribute to the entire course score. The Grade Builder sublink is located under the Syllabus Main Link in the Navigation Panel.

    A sample Grade Builder is displayed below. Note that there is a checkbox that when checked causes the Grade Builder summary to be displayed in the student's grade reports. If you do not check the checkbox, you as an instructor will still view the student's grade summary in your view of the student's grade report, but it will be invisible to students.

    gradebuilder1.gif

    In the capture below, a Learner's grade report based on the Grade Builder above is illustrated:

    gradebuilder2.gif

    The Grade Builder does NOT need to be based around a 100 point scale. The Grade Builder can total any value you choose.

    Only objects that count toward a student's average grade should be entered into the gradebuilder. Scored assignments that don't count as part of the final score will still be reported to the students in the appropriate assessment area of their grade report.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    5.14.1) Assigning Extra Credit

    Knowledge Providers can also use the Grade Builder feature to make an evaluation learning object an Extra Credit activity.


    Simply mark the extra-credit checkbox and supply the point value for an item:

    extracredit1.gif



    The grade builder summary in the student's profile will differentiate the extra-credit points from the regular points.

    extracredit2.gif


    Tips!

    tip.gif 'Extra' credit can be negative. To 'dock' students for tardiness, absence etc, set the extra credit value to a negative number.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com



    5.15) Letter Grade Builder



    Letter Grade Builder: A tool that allows you to associate a range of points with a letter grade such as A B C or P/ F


    To access the Letter Grade Builder, click on the Syllabus navigation Main Link, and then the Grade Builder sublink.

    First designate how many letter grades you wish to define.

    letterbuilder.gif

    You may use the traditional A,B,C,D... letter grade set, P/F (pass/fail) or any other letter assignations you like.

    letterbuilder2.gif

    You may base your letter grades on total points, total percent or current percent.

    gradebuilderletterbase.gif

    Once input into the system, you may click on the COPY LETTER BUILDER TO OTHER COURSES to export them to any other course in your account.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com



    5.16) Member Notebook



    Member Notebook: A tool that allows you make private notations about a student. It also tracks email sent to or from a student's course mailbox.


    The Notebook feature is a link called Member Notebook located within the student profile section of the grade summary. With it, course facilitators can make text entries and notations to each Learners Grade Book. Entries are visible only to the instructor, not to the Learner.

    membernotebook1.gif

    membernotebook2.gif


    The member notebook also automatically tracks email sent to and received from the student as long as it is from or to an Educator email address. Here is an example of a member notebook containing two notations and a log of email messages.

    membernotebook.gif


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    5.17) Usage Information

    Usage Logs record an individual's total number of log-ins, time spent in the course, and when activities in the course were initiated and completed.
    A link to condensed usage information can be found in the student grade report.
    A detailed report can be found via the Usage Log sublink under the Students main link in the navigation column


    The Usage Log displays all the times that learners have signed in and out of a particular course, detailing:
    • the total number of connections
    • a summary of time spent in hours and minutes
    • a list of student actions.

    usagelog1a.gif

    Learners must log out of their sessions each time for this tabulation to be useful.

    Click on a learner's name to view detailed usage information.

    usagelog2a.gif


    Condensed usage information can also be accessed directly from the learner's grade summary.

    usagelog3a.gif


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    5.18) Downloading Grades

    Knowledge Providers can Download Grades to text files for offline viewing. Locate the Course Manager main navigation link and then locate the Spreadsheets sublink. In addition, when you are in the master gradebook under Students (New Gradebook Interface), there is an export/import link at the top of the page.

    You can extract student information and usage statistics, attendance reports, or grade data for one or all items.

    spreadsheets1.gif

    Student Data



    Selecting Student Data: Student Roster Only extracts the information that is stored within a student profile. If you check the student usage box, additional columns listing a count of connections made and minutes spent online is added.

    spreadsheetroster.gif


    If you check the attendance report a spreadsheet details you've recorded about student attendance, tardiness and absense will be displayed.

    spreadsheetattendance.gif



    Grade Data



    You may create a grade report spreadsheet for one object, Gradebuilder objects or all objects.

    To request a single object report, scroll down to that evaluation object and click the link.

    spreadsheetoneobject.gif

    To request the entire gradebook, click on either Entire Course Gradebook or Grade Builder Report Only. The gradebuilder report will show just those objects that calculate into a student's final grade, and not objects that do not count. Remember that only items included in your course gradebuilder will calculate towards a student's final grade.


    spreadsheetallVSgb.gif




    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com



    5.19) Tracking Events

    The Notification Center can track student activity such as log-ins, submissions and access of course materials. You can query activities that have taken place during specific periods of time. The Notification Center is a sublink under the Course Materials



    How to use it...

    Click on the Notification Center sublink under the Course Materials main navigation link to bring up a table showing all evaluation objects. Place a checkmark in front of the object or objects that you wish to track. Specify the time frame--from "today" to "all events". Then choose the course and student's name.

    The following example shows the notification center set up to track all Discussion Board postings for a learner named "Student 6" since the course began (all events).
    notificationcenter1.gif
    notificationcenter2.gif


    Tips!

    To have an email summary of events sent to you automatically, see Advanced Event Tracking in this Help Center.


    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    5.19.1) Advanced Event Tracking

    The Advanced Notification Center sends email alerts to inform instructors of Learner actions within their online courses. The Advanced Notification Center is a link located within the Notification Center



    How to use it...

  • Click on the Advanced Notification Center link within the Notification Center.
  • Place a checkmark in front of each event that you wish to track.

    advancednotification1.gif


  • Type in your email and/or pager address.
  • Indicate the method of notification you wish to receive.
  • If you wish to receive alerts as events occur, choose "Email or Page me immediately."
    Note: this may result in a lot of alerts!
  • If your email software can display HTML, check the box in front of "Include HTML links in email". Each separate item listed will link back to the event.

    advancednotification2.gif


  • If you did not request immediate notification above, then check all the days and times that you wish to receive alerts.
  • Turn the scheduled Email or pager notification system ON.

    advancednotification3.gif


  • Select the courses to apply the notification settings.
  • Submit

    advancednotification4.gif

    Even if you choose several courses, the summary of events will be delivered for all courses in a single e-mail or page.

    When a course is closed to student access, the notification settings for that course will be ignored, for both student and instructor.

    The above examples show settings for email alerts each night at 8 p.m. with a summary of all new discussion board activity and all exam submissions.



    Tips!

  • If you set the Advanced Notification Settings to inform you of student access to course materials, you will have a record of event access and submission. This serves as a good double-check of students who claim to have accessed and submitted time-sensitive materials.

  • For quick acces to this highly useful feature, click on the 'Megaphone' icon at the bottom of any Educator page.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    5.20) Scheduling Resource Delivery

    Actions: Any scheduled change in status of a course activity or reminder of an activity. Actions can be scheduled in advance to operate automatically. /td>

    QuickStart Directions

  • Click on any controlled activity object (exam, discussion group, packet, etc)
  • Click on the Schedule Action link in the control panel

    actionsschedulewithalerts.gif

  • Indicate the date that you wish to have this activity take place
  • Choose the action (make active, make inactive, lock, unlock)
  • Check any optional activities that you would like to occur when this action takes place: i.e. force students into the object, send email alerts)
  • If you have optioned to send email alerts to yourself or your students, type in the email text.
  • Click [Submit]


    Details

    Scheduling Actions from the Actions Sublink

    Any packet and its contents can be scheduled to activate or inactivate automatically at a specified date and time. Besides the Schedule Action option in the object control panel of a controlled object explained in the QuickStart Directions, there is also an Actions sublink under the Course Information main link. To use this, you must first know the object ID number of the item you wish to schedule.

    By controlled object I mean any object that has an option to activate, deactivate, lock or unlock. General documents can't be scheduled for viewing. But if you put them in a packet, the packet itself can be scheduled to lock or unlock, giving you control over all course materials.

    actionscheduletable.gif

    After scheduling an object and clicking on [Submit], a table of scheduled actions will show you what you have set. To change or remove an action, click on the action link: for example, in this example, you would click on Locked to change or remove the scheduling for that object.


    Scheduling Independent Email Reminders

    Email reminders don't have to be associated with a particular scheduled action. You can schedule an email reminder to yourself or anyone else in the class about anything. To do this:
  • Click on the Course Information main navigator link
  • Click on the Actions sublink
  • Click on Schedule an Action

    actionscheduleemail.gif

  • Set the time and date and change the Object Control selection to Email Reminder
  • Click on [Submit]
  • Type in the email address if the message is not to go to yourself.
  • Type in the message
  • [Submit]

    Your email message will be delivered at the time and date you specified.

    Usage Tips

    tip.gifIf you are sending an email alert to your students, and you are using the View As Student feature in your course, you need not check the option to send yourself an email, as you will get one due to your student status in the course.




    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com





    6) Customizing

    INstructors or Administrators can customize the entire Educator interface to create a course environment that is aesthetically pleasing and functional. The Educator platform lets the providers design courses that are highly customized, meeting the exact form and function requirements desired.


    Upon clicking on the customize button you have the ability to perform the following tasks:

  • Change the names of the main and sublinks along the navigation panel
  • Insert external URLs or Object IDs into the links
  • Customize the arrangement of links from the instructor and learner perspective
  • Hidelinks from view
  • Adjust the width of the navigation panel
  • Designate an exit URL to which learners are taken upon exiting the course.

    The next several sections goes into each process individually.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com





    6.1) Navigation Column


    The Navigation Column: The list of links running down the left side of the course. The navigation column is made up of 17 main links and more than 60 sublinks that can be edited, moved or hidden.


    Details

    Main Navigation Links

    One of the most important management tasks when setting up an online course environment is creating an intuitive, user-friendly navigation column. It is important to place your main links and sublinks in a manner that makes sense for the way you need and use them. And get rid of links that you don't use at all.
    Underneath the Customize control panel is a listing of seventeen main link functions. Any of these links can be hidden, and additional main links can be added to provide navigation to other areas besides the default seventeen.

    environment17mainlinks.gifThe controls shown below correspond to the navigator column shown at left. Due to space constraints, only links one and two are shown.

    customize1mainsections.gif


    Creating a New Link

    At the top of the link controls and between every main link is an option to insert a new button or navigator link. Click on Add button Here and you will get a new blank button control in the navigation column space that you selected.

    Because all of the button forms function the same way, filling out a new button form is a good way to learn how the links can be edited.



    customizeaddbuttonblank.gif

    This image shows a blank navigation button ready to be configured.

  • Type in a Label. This is the text that users would click.
  • Next, type in a URL if this button is meant to link to an external site. Otherwise, erase the URL that is there.
  • Choose a function ID.

    customize1functions1.gifThe easiest way to do this is to use the Drop-down menu. A list of Educator functions will appear--either pertaining to instructors or students, depending upon which navigator column you are configuring.
    Highlight the function that you wish this link to perform.
    Type in a description. This is mainly for your own reference.


    If you don't want this button to be visible at this time on the navigation column, click on Hide Button from View

    If you would like the links to be images instead of text, then you may upload up to three images.

    The MouseOff image is what the user sees normally--when the mouse isn't on the link. The MouseOn image is what the user sees when the mouse touches the link. The Activated Image is what the user sees when the link is active: i.e. when the user has clicked on the link and is in the linked document.
    Some browsers are not able to interpret mouse-on/off code. In that case, the user always sees the off image. This will not affect the link function.
    The navigation column can also utilize cascading style sheets (CSS) to achieve the same mouseover effects using text instead of pictures. See the paragraph below: CSS Nav Bar.


    Advanced Controls

    If you would like to change font face or size, set the target window for a link, or configure the sublinks, click on the Advanced Button controls and Sublinks link within any main link button form.
    From here you can remove the button altogether. In addition, you'll be able to set the following functions:
    Target
    _top is the default and the link will open in the same window.
    popup will open the link in a small window on top of the current window.
    left or right will open the link in the left or right frame.
    new will open the link in a new full-sized window.

    Use the popup width and height specifications only if you have chosen popup as your target.
    Use Yes to answer the question "Open in Frame? only if you have specified left or right as your target.

    You may adjust the spacing of your navigation links by adjusting the Button Height up or down. It defaults to 25. Raising it will create more space between buttons vertically. Lowering it will compress the space between buttons vertically.

    Sublinks

    customize2sublinks1.gif

    All of the sublink controls will appear below the main link entry. The sublink customization form looks pretty much the same as the main link forms. Again, you may edit, hide or add sublinks the same way you did the main navigator links.


    CSS Nav Bar

    Cascading Style Sheets can be used to achieve a mouseover effect similar to the one described above using images. This results in a much faster load time. However, you must know how to use CSS in order to use this advanced function.

    To use a stylesheet in Educator to format the navigation column, go to the Customize control panel where you'll find a link to click called CSS Nav Bar.

    customizecontropanel3CSS.gif

    This is labeled as an advanced function because you will have to have created a style sheet to insert here.

    customizecssnavinput.gif

    At the top of the screen the stylesheet elements are defined. The code in the textbox reflects the all-text navigation bar shown to the left of the displayed screen. If you study the elements, properties and values, you'll see how the display area, fonts and hover qualities of the nav bar have been set in the code example. (This is the navigation bar in the demo.ucompass.com course.)

    A simpler stylesheet may only change the font. To explain how this works, let's just look at the lines of code that establishes the base display of the navigation bar and then changes the font when the cursor hovers or clicks on the link:

    custCSSnavbarlabelhover.gifAt left is a section of a typical navigation column. We want to make the Customize link label change font and color when the cursor touches it. Here's a sampling of stylesheet code that will do that:

    div#navbar a { display: block; margin: 0; padding: 2px; letter-spacing: 1px; text-align: left; font-family:Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif; font-size:14px; font-weight: bold; text-decoration:none; }
    div#navbar a:hover { font-family:verdana; font-weight:bold; color:#0000ff }
    div#navbar The beginning is called the selection. It's the element that we want to act on; in this case, the entire nav bar base look.
    a The a refers to the anchor just as when you create a link.

    Inside the bracket is the formatting we want to use on the navbar:
    display: block; margin: 0; Here we are specifying that the text appear in a block format with no margin...similar to a table with no border.
    padding: 2px; This creates space between the labels.
    Here's the difference between 2 pixels and 8 pixels: custCSSnavbarlabelspadding2px.gif custCSSnavbarlabelspadding8px.gif
    letter-spacing: 1px This refers to the number of pixels between letters. custCSSnavbarlabelletterspacing1.gif =1 pixel custCSSnavbarlabelletterspacing3.gif =3 pixels
    Be careful not to make the spacing so large that the link wraps to two lines.
    text-align: left; You can specify text alignment as left, center or right.
    font-family:Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif;You can specify any font face you like as long as it's available on users' systems. Custom fonts will render probably as Times Roman or the like. Common web-friendly fonts are arial, helvetica, Verdana and Georgia
    font-size:14px; font-weight: boldSpecify font size by the number of pixels, and weight as bold, bolder, normal or in values from 100(thin) -900(heavy), in increments of 100.
    text-decoration:none;Text decoration can be :underline :line (line through text) and :overline.

    The next line specifies what happens to the nav bar labels when a cursor hovers over a label.
    div#navbar a:hover This is still referring to the anchor, but now notice the term hover.
    { font-family:verdana; This specifies that the font should change from arial to verdana (a slightly larger font)
    font-weight:bold;This makes the verdana remain bold.
    color:#0000ff }This makes the color change from the base color specified in the customization font area, which in this case is navy to #0000ff, which is the hexidecimal value for blue.

    custCSSnavbarlabel1link.gif becomescustCSSnavbarlabel2link.gif


    That's a very quick overview of the way a stylesheet works.
    If you'd like to learn more about using stylesheets, here is a good tutorial from W3Schools.


    Tips
    tip.gif

    The font size for all buttons defaults to 2. This is the second smallest font size you can use on the web. Sublinks are generally size 1. Remember to make that change if you add a new sublink form, or it will look oversized compared to the other sublinks.

    caution.gifDon't make changes and then click on a link before submitting those changes or they will not be saved. In other words, don't change the labels on all of your links and then click on the upload image link before saving your label changes.

    caution.gifAlthough the links and sublinks have been designed to allow you the greatest flexibility, please be aware of what happens when you make changes. For example, if you make the syllabus display a direct link, you will lose access to the links available on the normal syllabus main page. Test your changes carefully before implementation to make sure all functionality that you need is retained.



    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com




    6.2) Setting the Course Aesthetics

    Colors & Fonts: This refers to the color of the screen background, navigator column background, and the color and font face of the text and links including visited links and active links.


    Details

    Changing Color Schemes

    Changing the color scheme of your courses is a simple operation. Unlike the button labels and images, the color scheme will be the same whether set for instructor or student view.

    customizecontrolpanel1colors.gif

    In the control panel at the top of the Customize main page, choose This skin color and fonts. This will open a three-frame screen.
    In the first (Arrow 1 below) is a list of all of the different areas where you can implement a color change. For example, you can change the color of the tables, links or background.Arrow #2 points to an actual color chart. Arrow #3 points to the sample illustrating your choice. So to change the color of visited links in the screen example above, click on Color of visited links in area #1, then choose the color, say, Aquamarine and then view what that would look like in area #3.

    customizecolors.gif

    The Preview option at the bottom of the page will show you what the whole page would look like with all of your choices.
    At the very bottom, your header image is reproduced as an aid to selecting colors that work well together.
    You'll notice that you can control not only the color of the fonts and links, but also their size. Font sizes range from 1, the smallest, to 7, the largest. The default for navigation links is 2. The default for sublinks is 1. The values set here affect all links and all sublinks. However, in the navigation column customization control area, links and sublinks can be set individually.


    Usage Tips

    tip.gifMake a note of which colors you used for each font or course area. Once you change it, you may not like it, and it may be difficult to differentiate among the different shades of a color if you want to set it back to what you had.



    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com




    6.3) Icons/Logos

    By default, you will notice that text appears in the Navigation Panel for each of the Main Links. However, if you go to the Icons/Logos sublink under the Main Link, you can replace Main link text with new text or GIF or JPG images.

    We will go through the process of adding an icon to a course.

    First, we'll start with a new course with the standard graphics and logos:

    icons1.gif

    icons2.gif

    icons3.gif

    You can also add mouseover icons that will make the Main Link change when the mouse is over it to aid in navigation of the site. Place your mouse arrow over the following icon to see the effect:
    Mailbox

    Note: if you are using a browser other than I.e., you may not see the mouseover effect

    See the Help Center section Customizing > Head Functions for ways to use 'hover' effects on text and links.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com






    6.4) Head Functions

    Images: For customization purposes, this refers to the images that appear at the top of each course (head), when you or a student logs into a course (center image) and the background of the navigation column (optional).


    QuickStart Directions

    To customize standard course images

  • Click on the Customize main navigator link
    customizecontrolpanel2images.gif

  • In the control panel at the top of the page, click on This skin images and head functions
  • If you would like to upload a new HEAD image, browse for the file, highlight it so the file name appears in the upload box.
  • Repeat this procedure if you would like to upload a login image or a navigator background image.
  • Click [Submit]
  • Make sure you are viewing the correct skin. If you have more than one skin, select the correct one from the drop down menu. You may need to click on the Refresh function on your browser menu bar.

    Details

    customizeheadimage.gif

    The top image of the Educator big-E logo shown above is what Educator refers to as a course head image. It always has a file name of 'head.gif'.

    You can remove this image which will give you an option to upload a custom head image of your own. This image, which must be a gif image format, will be renamed from the name you uploaded to 'head.gif' so that Educator knows its function.

    Under that will be an option to load an image that will appear one time only....upon login to the course. Some instructors put a picture of themselves there.

    customizeimagenavbackground.gif

    Under that image will be an option to load an image that will appear behind the navigation column. The blue pattern in the course screen shown above is an example of using an image as a background to the navigation colummn.
    Note how small the actual image of the pattern is. Most backgrounds are very small in size and are 'tiled' or repeated by the browser display. So judging the size is not an issue at all.

    Knowledge Providers can add navigation functions to the head image (the image that appears in the center screen accross the top). In the example of the demo course head image shown, each small square in the image clicks out to a different link.

    You need some knowledge of a graphics program such as PhotoShop or Paint Shop Pro to map the coordinates of each 'hot' section of the image. Then click the This skin images and head functions link in the customization control panel. Find and click the ADD HEAD FUNCTION link.

    headfunction1.gif

    Add the head function code into either the instructor or learner or both head function input boxes. Most HTML reference books have details on the necessary code.

    headfunction2.gif

    Usage Tips

    tip.gifTo locate interesting backgrounds for your course, do a search engine search on AltaVista or Google using the search terms "free background images".


    caution.gifOnce you have created several skins, make sure that you have the correct one selected when you make any changes. If you leave the Customize area and then return to it, your skin will default to the course default skin. You may need to select a different skin to work on.

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@ucompass.com




    7) Wireless Educator

    Wireless Educator lets you take the powerful Educator program with you anywhere you go by bringing the content delivery, communication and evaluation capabilities of Educator to wireless devices such as PalmOS and Windows CE handhelds.

    Wireless Educator is a version of Educator that has been optimized for small screens.

    You can perform many of Educator's web-based features with Wireless Educator including e-mail, chat, instant messaging, discussion boards, and much more.

    wirelesseducator1.gif

    wirelesseducator2.gif

    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com






    7.1) PalmOS Devices


    To use a wireless PalmOS device with Wireless Educator, do the following:

    1) Download the WIRELESS EDUCATOR PQA. A PQA is a Palm Query Application that enables your wireless PalmOS device to clip Internet content.

    2) Install the Wireless Educator PQA onto your PalmOS handheld

    3) Find the Educator icon on your Palmtop and click on it

    wirelesseducator3.gif

    4) Enter your sign in URL for Educator, your username, and your password

    wirelesseducator4.gif

    5) Notice the different landscape of Wireless Educator where the navigation menu is a dropdown menu at the top of each page

    wirelesseducator5.gif



    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com






    7.2) Windows CE Devices

    If you are using a Windows CE handheld or any other small screen device, including a PalmOS browser, you can point the device's browser to:

    http://educator.ucompass.com/educator/wireless.html

    and sign into an Educator environment optimized for small screens.

    wirelesseducator6.gif



    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com







    7.3) Pushing Course Info to Cell Phones/Pagers

    At the lower part of the Advanced Notification Center, you can set up Educator to push information about learner actions to your cell phone/pager at specified time intervals.

    First, complete the form at the top of the page specifying the learner actions you wish to be notified about:

    advancednotification2.gif

    Then finalize your settings:

    advancednotification3.gif

    If you have a pager or cell phone and are not sure if it is capable of receiving e-mail text messages, contact your wireless service provider.

    The information that comes to your cell phone or pager is very brief and just provides a summary of events.

    Many mobile phone/pager services limit pages to 150 characters or less. Therefore, we have derived the following special codes:

    The codes are summarized below:

  • A - Assignment feedback postings
  • UF - Student files uploaded
  • E - Exam submissions
  • Q - Quiz submissions
  • W - Worksheet submissions
  • PT - Practice tests completed
  • S - Survey submissions
  • B - Student bookmark postings
  • D - Discussion board postings
  • T - Tasksheet feedback postings
  • EM - Unread e-mail messages in mailbox

    When using mobile phone/pager capabilities with Educator, you are FULLY RESPONSIBLE for any charges that you incur from your mobile phone/pager provider! Many mobile phone/pager companies charge customers on a per page basis!




    Please send your own training tips or comments to training@ucompass.com for inclusion in this topic.
    Note: Technical support questions should be addressed to support@educator.ucompass.com